WO2015054850A1 - Communication method, communication device, and communication system - Google Patents

Communication method, communication device, and communication system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015054850A1
WO2015054850A1 PCT/CN2013/085334 CN2013085334W WO2015054850A1 WO 2015054850 A1 WO2015054850 A1 WO 2015054850A1 CN 2013085334 W CN2013085334 W CN 2013085334W WO 2015054850 A1 WO2015054850 A1 WO 2015054850A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
response
base station
request
sends
proxy binding
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2013/085334
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
何宁
朱雷
熊春山
麦肯·彼得
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CN201380002528.6A priority Critical patent/CN105264956A/en
Priority to PCT/CN2013/085334 priority patent/WO2015054850A1/en
Publication of WO2015054850A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015054850A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00Network data management
    • H04W8/02Processing of mobility data, e.g. registration information at HLR [Home Location Register] or VLR [Visitor Location Register]; Transfer of mobility data, e.g. between HLR, VLR or external networks
    • H04W8/08Mobility data transfer
    • H04W8/082Mobility data transfer for traffic bypassing of mobility servers, e.g. location registers, home PLMNs or home agents
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/12Setup of transport tunnels
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/14Reselecting a network or an air interface

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method, a communication device, and a communication system.
  • the existing Evolved Packet System (hereinafter referred to as EPS) architecture is centralized mobility management.
  • the EPS architecture when the terminal device UE initially attaches, the UE sends the attachment request information to the base station eNB of the cell in which it is located. Then, the eNB selects a Mobility Management Entity (hereinafter referred to as MME) to which the UE can attach according to the attach request information, and selects, by the MME, a Serving Gateway (hereinafter referred to as S-GW) and a packet that can be attached.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • S-GW Serving Gateway
  • a Packet Data Network Gateway (P-GW) allocates an IP address to the UE, that is, an EPS bearer is established between the UE and the P-GW, and is considered to be an EPS default bearer.
  • the Distributed Mobility Management (DMM) network is introduced, that is, a local gateway (hereinafter referred to as L_GW) corresponding to the base station is set for each base station of the existing EPS network. Or, an L_GW corresponding to the multiple base stations is set for multiple base stations of the existing EPS network.
  • DMM Distributed Mobility Management
  • the embodiments of the present invention provide a communication method, a communication device, and a communication system, which can perform network switching in a scenario where an EPS network and a D-network coexist, or in a scenario of a D-network of a different cell.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication method, including: The first local gateway L-GW receives the create session request, where the create session request carries the address identifier of the second L-GW or the address identifier of the packet data network gateway P-GW, the second L-GW, the The P-GW is connected before the user equipment UE switches to the first L-GW, and the UE is currently connected to the first L-GW;
  • the first L-GW establishes with the second L-GW or the according to the create session request
  • the first L-GW sends a create session response.
  • the first local gateway L-GW receives a create session request, including:
  • the first L-GW receives a create session request sent by the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW;
  • the first L-GW sends a create session response, including:
  • the first L-GW sends a create session response to the first base station.
  • the first local gateway L-GW receives the create session request, including:
  • the first L-GW receives a create session request sent by the first mobility management entity MME corresponding to the first L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW;
  • the first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the creation session request, and includes:
  • the first L-GW sends a create session response, including:
  • the first L-GW sends a create session response to the first MME.
  • the first local gateway L-GW receives the create session request, including:
  • the first L-GW receives a creation session sent by the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW Requesting, the creating a session request includes an address identifier of the P-GW;
  • the first L-GW establishes a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request; the first L-GW sends a create session response, including:
  • the first L-GW sends a create session response to the first base station.
  • the first local gateway L-GW receives the create session request, including:
  • the first L-GW receives a create session request sent by the first mobility management entity MME corresponding to the first L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the P-GW; And establishing, by the L-GW, a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the creating a session request, including:
  • the first L-GW establishes a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request; the first L-GW sends a create session response, including:
  • the first L-GW sends a create session response to the first MME.
  • the first L-GW establishes a The connection between the second L-GW or the P-GW includes:
  • the first L-GW Sending, by the first L-GW, a proxy binding update or modifying a bearer request to the second L-GW; the first L-GW receiving a proxy binding response or modifying a bearer response sent by the second L-GW .
  • the first L-GW Establishing a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the creating a session request, including:
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication method, including:
  • the second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request, and the second L-GW connects to the first L-GW or the packet data network gateway P_GW before the user equipment UE switches Pick up
  • the second L-GW establishes a connection with the first L-GW or the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify bearer request;
  • the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response.
  • the second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request, including:
  • the second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update sent by the first L-GW or modifies the bearer request
  • the second L-GW establishes a bearer with the first L-GW or the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request, and includes:
  • the second L-GW establishes a connection with the first L-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify bearer request;
  • a proxy binding response or modifying a bearer response including:
  • the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the first L-GW.
  • the second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request, including:
  • the second L-GW establishes a connection with the first L-GW or the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify bearer request, and includes:
  • the second L-GW establishes a connection with the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify bearer request;
  • a proxy binding response or modifying a bearer response including:
  • the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the P-GW.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the first L-GW;
  • the second L-GW deletes a connection with the first L-GW;
  • the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW.
  • the second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the P-GW;
  • the second L-GW deletes a connection with the P-GW
  • the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the P-GW.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication method, including:
  • the second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or deletes the session request
  • the second L-GW deletes the connection with the first L-GW or the connection with the packet data network gateway P-GW, where the first L-GW is currently connected by the user equipment UE, a second L-GW or the P-GW connected before the UE is connected to the first L-GW;
  • the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes a session response.
  • the second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or deletes the session request, and includes:
  • the second L-GW receives a proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the first L-GW; the second L-GW deletes a connection with the first L-GW or with the P-GW Connections, including:
  • the second L-GW deletes the connection with the first L-GW, where the first L-GW is currently connected by the user equipment UE, and the second L-GW is the first connection of the UE to the UE L-GW connected before;
  • the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes the session response, including:
  • the MME sends a delete session response.
  • the second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or deletes the session request, including:
  • the second L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the P-GW; the second L-GW deletes the connection with the P-GW, including: The second L-GW deletes the connection with the P-GW, where the first L-GW is currently connected by the user equipment UE, and the P-GW connects the first L- to the UE.
  • the GW is connected before; the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes the session response, including:
  • the second local gateway L-GW receives the first L-GW sending Before deleting the session request, it also includes:
  • the second L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first L-GW.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication method, including: when a user equipment UE is handed over from a second base station to a first base station,
  • the first local gateway L-GW receives the modify bearer request
  • the first L-GW changes the stored current serving node information of the UE from the second base station information to the first base station information, where the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same first L-GW;
  • the first L-GW sends a modify bearer response.
  • the first L-GW receives the modify bearer request, and includes:
  • the first L-GW sends a modify bearer response, including:
  • the first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first base station.
  • the first L-GW receives the modify bearer request, and includes:
  • the first L-GW sends a modify bearer response, including:
  • the first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first MME.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication method, including: when a user equipment is handed over from a second base station to a first base station,
  • the first mobility management entity MME receives the path switch request sent by the first base station, where the path switch request carries the distributed mobility management Dali identifier and the first local network. Off the L-GW address, the path switching request, so that the first L-GW modifies information of the second base station stored in the first L-GW to information of the first base station, the first base station and the The second base station corresponds to the same first L-GW;
  • the path that the first MME switches to the first base station according to the path switching request is that the first base station is connected to the first L-GW;
  • the first router sends a path switch response to the first base station, so that the first base station notifies the second base station to perform resource release.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway, including:
  • a receiving module configured to receive a create session request, where the create session request carries an address identifier of the second local gateway L-GW or an address identifier of the packet data network gateway P-GW, the second L-GW, the The P-GW is connected before the user equipment UE switches to the L-GW, and the UE is currently connected to the L-GW;
  • a processing module configured to establish a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request
  • a sending module configured to send a create session response.
  • the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a create session request sent by the first base station corresponding to the L-GW, where the create session request includes the second L-GW Address identifier
  • the processing module is specifically configured to establish a connection with the second L-GW according to the creation session request;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first base station.
  • the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a create session request sent by a first mobility management entity MME corresponding to the L-GW, where the create session request includes the second Address identifier of the L-GW;
  • the processing module is specifically configured to establish a connection with the second L-GW according to the creation session request;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first MME.
  • the receiving module is configured to receive a create session request sent by the first base station corresponding to the L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the P-GW;
  • the processing module is specifically configured to establish a connection with the P-GW according to the creation session request;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first base station.
  • the receiving module is configured to receive a create session request sent by the first mobility management entity LIE corresponding to the first L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the P-GW;
  • the processing module is specifically configured to establish a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first MME.
  • the sending module is further configured to send to the second L-GW The proxy binds to update or modify the bearer request;
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response sent by the second L-GW.
  • the sending module is further used Sending a proxy binding update or modifying a bearer request to the P-GW;
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive a proxy binding response or modify a bearer response sent by the P-GW.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway, including:
  • a receiving module configured to receive a proxy binding update or modify a bearer request, where the local gateway L-GW is connected before the user equipment UE switches to the first L-GW or the packet data network gateway P-GW;
  • a processing module configured to establish, according to the proxy binding update or modify a bearer request, a connection with the first L-GW or the P-GW;
  • a sending module configured to send a proxy binding response or modify a bearer response.
  • the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding update or modify a bearer request sent by the first L-GW;
  • the processing module is specifically configured to update or modify a bearer request according to the proxy binding, and build Establishing a connection with the first L-GW;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to send a proxy binding response or modify a bearer response to the first L-GW.
  • the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding update or modify a bearer request sent by the P-GW;
  • the processing module is specifically configured to establish, according to the proxy binding update or modify a bearer request, a connection with the P-GW;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to send a proxy binding response or modify a bearer response to the P-GW.
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive a proxy binding update sent by the first L-GW or Delete the session request;
  • the processing module is further configured to delete a connection with the first L-GW;
  • the sending module is further configured to send a proxy binding response or delete a session response to the first L-GW.
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive a proxy binding update sent by the P-GW or Delete the session request;
  • the processing module is further configured to delete a connection with the P-GW;
  • the sending module is further configured to send a proxy binding response or delete a session response to the P-GW.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway, including:
  • a receiving module configured to receive a proxy binding update or delete a session request
  • a processing module configured to delete a connection with the first local gateway L-GW or a connection with the packet data network gateway P-GW, where the first L-GW is currently connected by the user equipment UE, the L - GW or the P-GW is connected before the UE is connected to the first L-GW;
  • a sending module configured to send a proxy binding response or delete a session response.
  • the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding update or delete a session request sent by the first L-GW;
  • the processing module is specifically configured to delete a connection with the first L-GW, the first L-GW The user equipment UE is currently connected, and the L-GW is connected before the UE is connected to the first L-GW;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to send a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW, so that the first L-GW sends a first base station or a first corresponding to the first L-GW.
  • An MME sends a delete session response.
  • the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the P-GW;
  • the processing module is specifically configured to delete the connection with the P-GW, where the first L-GW is currently connected by the user equipment UE, and the P-GW is the UE connected to the first L -GW connected before;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to send a delete session response to the P-GW, so that the P-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes a session response to the first serving gateway corresponding to the P-GW.
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive the first L- Modifying the bearer request sent by the GW;
  • the sending module is further configured to send a modify bearer response to the first L-GW.
  • a ninth aspect, the embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway, including: when a user equipment UE is handed over from a second base station to a first base station,
  • a receiving module configured to receive a modify bearer request
  • a processing module configured to change the stored current UE service node information from the second base station information to the first base station information, where the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same local gateway;
  • a sending module configured to send a modified bearer response.
  • the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a modify bearer request sent by the first base station
  • the sending module is specifically configured to send a modified bearer response to the first base station.
  • the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a modify bearer request sent by the first MME;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to send a modify bearer response to the first MME.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a mobility management entity, including: when a user equipment is handed over from a second base station to a first base station,
  • a receiving module configured to receive a path switch request that is sent by the first base station, where the path switch request carries a distributed mobility management DMM identifier and a first local gateway L-GW address, where the path switch request is And causing the first L-GW to modify information of the second base station stored in the first L-GW to information of the first base station, where the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same first L-GW ;
  • a processing module configured to switch, according to the path switching request, a path of the first base station to be connected to the first L-GW by the first base station;
  • a sending module configured to send a path switch response to the first base station, to perform resource release between the first base station and the second base station.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway L-GW, including: a transmitter, a receiver, a memory, and a processor respectively connected to the transmitter, the receiver, and the memory, where Storing a set of program code in the memory, and the processor is configured to invoke the program code stored in the memory, and perform any one of the sixth aspect to the sixth possible implementation manner of the first aspect The method described.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway L-GW, including: a transmitter, a receiver, a memory, and a processor respectively connected to the transmitter, the receiver, and the memory, where Storing a set of program code in the memory, and the processor is configured to invoke program code stored in the memory, and perform any one of a second aspect to a fifth possible implementation of the second aspect The method described.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway L-GW, including: a transmitter, a receiver, a memory, and a processor respectively connected to the transmitter, the receiver, and the memory, where Storing a set of program code in the memory, and the processor is configured to invoke program code stored in the memory, and perform any one of a third aspect to a third possible implementation of the third aspect The method described.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway L-GW, including: a transmitter, a receiver, a memory, and a processor respectively connected to the transmitter, the receiver, and the memory, where Storing a set of program codes in the memory, and the processor is configured to invoke the program code stored in the memory, and perform the second aspect to the second aspect of the fourth aspect A method as claimed in any of the preceding embodiments.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a mobility management entity, including: a transmitter, a receiver, a memory, and a processor respectively connected to the transmitter, the receiver, and the memory, Wherein the memory stores a set of program codes, and the processor is configured to invoke program code stored in the memory to perform the method described in a possible implementation of the fifth aspect.
  • the communication method, the communication device, and the communication system receive a create session request by using the first local gateway L-GW, where the create session request carries the address identifier of the second L-GW or An address identifier of the packet data network gateway P-GW, and then the first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the creation session request, thereby completing the first L-GW and the second L -
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 15 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 16 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 17 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 19 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 20 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 25 is a schematic structural diagram of a mobility management entity according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • 26 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 27 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic structural diagram of an MME according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention are clearly and completely described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention.
  • the embodiments are a part of the embodiments of the invention, and not all of the embodiments. All other embodiments obtained by a person of ordinary skill in the art based on the embodiments of the present invention without creative efforts are within the scope of the present invention.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 1 , the communication method includes the following steps on the basis of maintaining service continuity of the UE:
  • Step 101 The first local gateway L-GW receives a create session request.
  • the creation session request carries the address identifier or packet data network of the second L-GW.
  • the second L-GW and the P-GW are connected before the UE is handed over to the first L-GW, where the second L-GW or the P-GW may allocate an IP address to the UE, and While the UE uses the first L-GW to allocate a new IP address, the UE may also use the IP address before the current handover, and the UE is currently connected to the first L-GW.
  • the UE performs handover between networks of different cells, where the network before and after the UE handover is a network supporting the D-function, which is referred to as a D-network, and in the current network connected to the UE, the first There is no interface between the first MME corresponding to the first L-GW, and the MME corresponding to the first L-GW is the MN 5 serving the UE.
  • the first L-GW may receive a create session request sent by the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW, where the session is created.
  • the request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW, where the UE is currently connected to the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW, and the UE is connected to the second L-GW before connecting with the first L-GW, and the UE further
  • the IP address assigned by the second L-GW to the UE before the current handover may be used.
  • the UE performs handover between networks of different cells, where the networks are all D-networks, and in the current UE-connected D-network, the first L-GW and the first L-GW An interface is provided between the corresponding MMEs.
  • the first L-GW may receive a create session request sent by the first MME, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW, where the UE and the UE
  • the first L-GW is connected to the second L-GW before the connection is made, and the UE may also use the IP address allocated by the second L-GW to the UE before the current handover.
  • the UE switches from the EPS network to the DMM network, and in the DMM network that the UE is currently connected to, the first L-GW has no interface with the MME corresponding to the first L-GW.
  • the first L-GW may receive a create session request sent by the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW, where the session is created.
  • the request includes an address identifier of the P-GW, where the UE is connected to the P-GW before the connection with the first L-GW, and the UE may also use the IP that is not allocated by the second L-GW for the UE. address.
  • the fourth applicable scenario the UE switches from the EPS network to the DMM network, and the UE is currently connected.
  • the DMM network an interface is provided between the first L-GW and the MME corresponding to the first L-GW.
  • the first L-GW may receive a create session request sent by the first MME corresponding to the first L-GW, where the session is created.
  • the request includes an address identifier of the P-GW, where the UE is connected to the P-GW before the connection with the first L-GW, and the UE may also use the IP that is not allocated by the second L-GW for the UE. address. .
  • Step 102 The first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request.
  • step 102 may be specifically as follows:
  • the first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW according to the create session request, and thus, the second L-GW is equivalent to the EPS of the prior art.
  • the function of the P-GW in the network, the first L-GW is equivalent to the function of the S-GW in the EPS network of the prior art.
  • step 102 first
  • the L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request, and specifically includes:
  • the first L-GW receives the proxy binding response sent by the second L-GW or modifies the bearer response.
  • the first L-GW establishes a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request, so that the first L-GW is equivalent to the EPS network in the prior art.
  • the function of the S-GW is equivalent to the EPS network in the prior art.
  • the step 102 the first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request, and may specifically include :
  • the first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or a modification bearer request to the P-GW;
  • the first L-GW receives the proxy binding response sent by the P-GW or modifies the bearer response.
  • Step 103 The first L-GW sends a create session response.
  • the step 103 may be specifically as follows: In the first applicable scenario or in the third applicable scenario, the first L-GW sends a create session response to the first base station.
  • the first L-GW sends a create session response to the first MME.
  • the communication method provided by the embodiment receives the create session request by the first local gateway L-GW, where the create session request carries the address identifier of the second L-GW or the address identifier of the packet data network gateway P-GW, and then, The first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request, thereby completing the connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, or completing the first L- The connection between the GW and the P-GW, the first L-GW sends a session creation response, thereby implementing handover of the UE between different networks.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 2, the communication method specifically includes the following steps:
  • Step 201 The second L-GW receives the proxy binding update or modifies the bearer request.
  • the second L-GW is connected before the UE is handed over to the first L-GW or the P-GW, where the first L-GW or the P-GW may allocate a new IP address to the UE, and The UE can not only use the new IP address, but also use the IP address before the current handover.
  • an implementation method of this embodiment may be applicable to the first applicable scenario or the second applicable scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 , and may also be applied to a new applicable scenario, such as a fifth applicable scenario or The sixth applicable scenario.
  • the interface between the second L-GW and the MME corresponding to the second L-GW is not set.
  • the second L-GW and the MME corresponding to the second L-GW are provided with an interface.
  • the second L-GW may receive the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request sent by the first L-GW or the P-GW, in any of the foregoing applicable scenarios.
  • Step 202 The second L-GW establishes a connection with the first L-GW or the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request.
  • an implementation method of this embodiment is applicable to the first mode in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the second L-GW establishes a connection with the first L-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request; and the second L in the fifth applicable scenario or the sixth applicable scenario.
  • the GW establishes a connection with the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or modification of the bearer request.
  • Step 203 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or modifies a bearer response.
  • an implementation method of this embodiment is applicable to the first applicable scenario or the second applicable scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1, where the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or modification to the first L-GW. Carrying a response; in the fifth applicable scenario or the sixth applicable scenario, the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the P-GW.
  • the communication method provided in this embodiment is to receive a proxy binding update or modify a bearer request by using the second local gateway L-GW, where the second L-GW is connected before the UE switches to the first L-GW or the P-GW, After the UE switches to the first L-GW or the P-GW, the second L-GW can still use the IP address allocated by the second L-GW for the UE; the second L-GW updates or modifies the bearer request according to the proxy binding, and establishes with the first a connection between the L-GW or the P-GW; the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or modifies the bearer response, thereby completing the connection between the second L-GW and the first L-GW or the P-GW, and further Realize the handover of the UE between different networks.
  • the second L-GW, or the second P-GW sends the proxy binding response or the modified bearer response
  • Step 204 The second L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the first L-GW.
  • the UE when the UE switches from one DMM network cell to another DMM network cell, whether there is an interface between the MME and the first L-GW in the new DMM network, regardless of whether the UE is currently connected to the D-network, the UE does not need the IP address assigned by the second L_GW or the second P-GW, so that the PDN connection can be disconnected, so that the second local gateway L-GW can receive the proxy sent by the first L-GW. Bind updates or delete session requests.
  • Step 205 The second L-GW deletes the bearer between the first L-GW and the first L-GW.
  • Step 206 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW.
  • the method may further include : The second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the P-GW; the second L-GW deletes the connection with the P-GW;
  • the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the P-GW.
  • the UE switches from the D-network to the EPS network, whether the interface exists between the MME and the first L-GW in the D-network connected to the UE, after the EPS network performs the PDN connection reconstruction, the UE does not need to The IP address allocated by the second L-GW is connected to the PDN connection, so that the second local gateway L-GW can receive the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the P-GW, and then perform the above method.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 3, the communication method specifically includes the following steps:
  • Step 301 The second L-GW receives the delete session request.
  • the UE when the UE switches from one DMM network cell to another DMM network cell, whether there is an interface between the MME and the first L-GW in the DMM network currently connected by the UE, in the new After the DMM network cell performs the reconstruction of the PDN connection, the UE may not need the IP address assigned by the second L-GW or the second P-GW, so that the PDN connection can be disconnected, that is, the second local gateway L-GW can receive the deletion. Session request.
  • the UE when the UE switches from one DMM network cell to one EPS network cell, after the new EPS network cell performs the PDN connection reconstruction, the UE may not need to allocate the second L-GW.
  • Step 302 The second L-GW deletes the connection with the first L-GW or the connection with the P_GW.
  • the second local gateway L-GW may receive the delete session request, so that the second L-GW deletes the connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, where The first L-GW is the L-GW to which the UE is currently connected, and the second L-GW is connected before the UE connects to the first L_GW.
  • the second L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the P-GW, so that the connection between the second L-GW and the P-GW is deleted, and the P-GW is the user equipment.
  • the second L-GW that is currently connected by the UE is connected before the UE connects to the P-GW.
  • the second L-GW may send a delete session response to the first L-GW, so that the first L-GW sends the first base station or the first corresponding to the first L-GW.
  • An MME sends a delete session response.
  • the second L-GW when the UE switches from one DMM network cell to one EPS network cell, after the second L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the P-GW, the second L-GW sends a P to the P The GW sends a delete session response, so that the P-GW sends a delete session response to the first S-GW corresponding to the P-GW.
  • the second local gateway L-GW receives the delete session request, so as to delete the connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW or the connection between the second L-GW and the P_GW, and then The second L-GW sends a delete session response, thereby deleting the connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, or establishing a connection between the first L-GW and the P-GW, so that the UE can switch. Go to other network cells.
  • the second local gateway L-GW may further include:
  • the second L-GW receives the modified bearer request sent by the first L-GW;
  • the second L-GW sends a modified bearer response to the first L-GW.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 4, the communication method specifically includes the following steps:
  • Step 401 The first L-GW receives the modify bearer request.
  • the UE may perform handover between different base stations, that is, the first base station and the second base station.
  • the data service when the data service occurs before the UE performs the handover, the data service is performed.
  • the first base station may send a path switch request to the corresponding first MME.
  • an interface exists between the MME and the first L-GW, and the first L-GW may receive the modify bearer request sent by the first base station.
  • an interface exists between the MME and the first L-GW, where An L-GW may receive a modify bearer request sent by the first MME.
  • Step 402 The first L-GW changes the stored current serving node information of the UE from the second base station information to the first base station information.
  • the first L-GW may modify the information of the originally stored second base station to the information of the first base station, where the first base station and the first base station The second base station corresponds to the same first L-GW, wherein the information of the first base station includes an address of the data transmission and a tunnel end point identifier (TEID).
  • TEID tunnel end point identifier
  • Step 403 The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response.
  • the interface between the MME and the first L-GW does not exist, and the first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first base station.
  • an interface exists between the MME and the first L-GW, and the first L-GW may send a modify bearer response to the first MME.
  • the first L-GW receives the modify bearer request, and then the first L-GW changes the stored current serving node information of the UE from the second base station information to the first base station information, and the first L-GW sends the information.
  • the bearer response is modified so that the UE can switch to other network cells.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 5, the communication method specifically includes the following steps:
  • Step 501 The first MME receives a path switch request sent by the corresponding first base station.
  • the path switching request carries the Dili identifier and the first L-GW address, and the path switching request is used to enable the first L-GW to modify the information of the second base station stored in the first L-GW to the information of the first base station.
  • the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same first L-GW.
  • the UE may perform handover between different base stations, that is, the first base station and the second base station.
  • the UE performs data service switching when a data service occurs before the handover occurs.
  • the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same L-GW, and the first MME receives the path switch request sent by the corresponding first base station.
  • the first MME receives the path switch request sent by the corresponding first base station, where the path switch request carries the information of the first base station, where the information includes the address and TEID of the data transmission.
  • Step 502 The first MME switches the path of the first base station to the first base according to the path switching request.
  • the station is connected to the first L-GW.
  • Step 503 The first switch sends a path switch response to the first base station.
  • the first MME receives the path switching request sent by the corresponding first base station, where the path switching request carries the Dili identifier, and the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same first L-GW, and then The first MME switches the path of the first base station according to the path switching request to the first base station to connect with the first L-GW, and the first MME sends a path switching response to the first base station, so that the first base station notifies the second base station. Release resources. Therefore, the first MME switches the path of the first base station according to the path switching request to the first base station to connect with the first L-GW, and the UE can switch from the first base station to the second base station while maintaining the continuity of the data connection.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a signaling process of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the UE performs handover between networks of different cells, where the networks before and after the UE handover are all Dy networks, and There is no interface between the L-GW and the MME in the first DMM network to which the current UE is connected.
  • the second L-GW in the second DMM network is When the UE is connected, the UE is assigned an IP address.
  • the UE may continue to use the IP address allocated by the second L-GW.
  • the communication method may specifically include the following steps:
  • Step 601 Perform a decision trigger switch between the first base station and the third base station.
  • the first base station in this embodiment is the base station to which the UE is currently connected, that is, the first base station is in the first D-network
  • the third base station is the base station that the UE last connected before switching to the first base station, that is, the third base station.
  • the first base station and the third base station trigger the handover according to the measurement result of the wireless link.
  • Step 602 The third base station sends a handover request to the third MME corresponding to the third base station, where the third MME corresponding to the third base station is that the third MME may serve the UE connected to the third base station.
  • the first MME corresponding to the first base station is that the first MME may serve the UE connected to the first base station.
  • Step 603 The third MME sends a forwarding relocation request to the first MME.
  • the forwarding relocation request carries UE context information.
  • Step 604 The first MME sends a handover request to the first base station.
  • Step 605 The first base station sends a create session request to the first L-GW corresponding to the first base station.
  • the create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW, where the second L-GW is in the second DMM network, and the IP address allocated by the second L-GW to the UE can always be Used by the UE.
  • Step 606 The first L-GW initiates an IP-CAN (IP-Connectivity Access Network) session establishment or modification process to the PCRF (Polic icy and Charging Rules Function).
  • IP-CAN IP-Connectivity Access Network
  • PCRF Policy and Charging Rules Function
  • the first L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF, and obtains PCC policy information of the UE.
  • PCC Policy and Charging Control
  • Step 607 The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or a modify bearer request to the second L-GW.
  • the proxy binding update or modify bearer request is used to establish a connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • Step 608 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the first L-GW.
  • Step 610 The first base station sends a handover request response to the first MME.
  • the handover request response carries a Dili identity.
  • Step 611 The first MME sends a forwarding relocation response to the third MME.
  • Step 612 The third router sends a handover command to the third base station.
  • Step 613 The third base station sends a handover command to the UE.
  • Step 614 The UE sends a handover confirmation to the first base station.
  • Step 615 The first base station sends a handover notification to the first MME.
  • Step 616 The UE performs a tracking area update process.
  • the first L-GW sends a proxy binding update (Proxy Binding Update) to the second L-GW.
  • PBU Proxy Binding Acknowledgement
  • the second L_GW sends a Proxy Binding Acknowledgement (PBA) message to the first L_GW to establish tunnel information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • PBA Proxy Binding Acknowledgement
  • the L-GW resource specifically, the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
  • the step 607 and the step 608 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 may further perform the step: the third L-GW receives the binding revocation indication sent by the second L-GW (Binding Revocation Indication)
  • the EPS bearer context information about this PDN connection is deleted.
  • the release of the third L-GW resource may be performed by the step 612 and the step 613: the third L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the third base station, and deletes the EPS bearer context about the PDN connection. information. It should be noted that if the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
  • the first L_GW sends a modify bearer request to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, step 608, the second L-GW
  • the first L_GW sends a modify bearer response message to establish bearer information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released.
  • the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
  • the step 612 and the step 613 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 may further perform the step: the third L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the third base station, and deletes the EPS bearer context information about the PDN connection. .
  • the basic principle of the UE handover method is basically the same as the basic principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, except that the third L-GW corresponds to the P-GW.
  • the third P-GW may perform the following steps: The S-GW sends a delete bearer request, and the third S-GW sends a delete bearer response to the third P_GW; or, after the third E sends a handover command to the third base station, the third E sends a delete session to the third S-GW.
  • the request, and the third S-GW send a delete session response to the third MME. If the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
  • the second L-GW is equivalent to the P-GW, and the process of releasing the S-GW resource release is needed in the second network, that is, in the second P-GW.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG.
  • the UE performs handover between networks of different cells, where the networks before and after the UE handover are all DMM networks, and an interface is set between the local gateway L-GW and the MME in the first D-network connected by the current UE. .
  • the second L-GW in the second DMM network is When the UE is connected, the UE is assigned an IP address.
  • the UE may continue to use the IP address assigned by the second L-GW.
  • the communication method may specifically include the following steps:
  • Step 701 Perform a decision trigger switch between the first base station and the third base station.
  • the first base station in this embodiment is a base station to which the UE is currently connected, that is, the first base station is in the first
  • the third base station is the base station that the UE last connected before switching to the first base station, that is, the third base station is in the third DMM network.
  • the first base station and the third base station trigger the handover according to the measurement result of the wireless link.
  • Step 702 The third base station sends a handover request to a third MME corresponding to the third base station.
  • the third MME corresponding to the third eNB may be that the third MME may serve the UE connected to the third eNB, and the first MME corresponding to the first eNB may be the first MME. Serving the UE connected to the first base station.
  • Step 703 The third MME sends a forwarding relocation request to the first MME, where the forwarding relocation request carries UE context information.
  • Step 704 The first E sends a handover request to the first base station.
  • the first MME informs the first base station of the EPS bearer context of each PDN connection.
  • Step 705 The first base station sends a handover request notification to the first MME corresponding to the first base station, where the handover request notification carries a Dili identifier and a first L-GW address identifier, where the first L-GW is In the first DMM network.
  • the DMM identity and the first L_GW address identifier indicate that the first base station supports the Dali service and that the first MME is required to establish a connection between the first base station and the first L-GW.
  • Step 706 The first E-E sends a create session request to the first L-GW, where the create session request carries the second L-GW address identifier.
  • Step 707 The first L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF.
  • the L-GW if dynamic PCC is deployed, the L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF, and obtains PCC policy information of the UE.
  • Step 708 The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or a modify bearer request to the second L-GW.
  • Step 710 The first L-GW sends a create session response to the first MME.
  • Step 71 The first MME sends a forwarding relocation response to the third MME.
  • Step 712 The first MME sends a handover request completion message to the first base station, where the handover request completion message includes an address of the uplink data transmission of the first L-GW corresponding to the first base station.
  • Step 713 The third router sends a handover command to the third base station.
  • Step 714 The third base station sends a handover command to the UE.
  • Step 715 The UE sends a handover confirmation to the first base station.
  • Step 716 The first base station sends a handover notification to the first MME.
  • Step 717 The first E sends a modify bearer request to the first L-GW.
  • Step 718 The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first MME.
  • Step 719 The UE performs a tracking area update process.
  • the step 708 the first L-GW sends a proxy binding update to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, the step 709.
  • the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response message to the first L-GW to establish tunnel information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released.
  • the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
  • the step 708 and the step 709 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 may further perform the step: the third L-GW receives the BRI message sent by the second L-GW, and deletes the EPS bearer related to the PDN connection. Contextual information. Or the release of the third L-GW resource may be performed between step 71 1 and step 712: the third L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the third MN, and deletes the EPS about the PDN connection. Host context information. It should be noted that if the UE directly from the second network The network switches to the first network, and the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
  • the step 708 the first L_GW sends a modify bearer request to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, step 709, the second L-GW The first L_GW sends a modify bearer response message to establish bearer information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • the third device After establishing the bearer information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, the third device needs to be released.
  • the L-GW resource specifically, the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
  • a step may be further performed between the step 71 1 and the step 712 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 : the third L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the third MME, and deletes the EPS about the PDN connection. Host context information.
  • the basic principle of the method for UE handover is basically the same as the basic principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 , except that the third L-GW corresponds to the P-GW, and The process of the S-GW resource release is required to be performed in the third network, that is, after the third P-GW receives the binding revocation indication message sent by the second L-GW, the following steps may be performed: the third P-GW goes to the third S.
  • the GW sends a delete bearer request, and the third S-GW sends a delete bearer response to the third P-GW; or, after the first MME sends the forward relocation response to the third MME, the third MME sends the third MME to the third S-GW. Sending a delete session request, and the third S-GW sends a delete session response to the third MME. If the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
  • the second L-GW is equivalent to the P-GW, and the process of releasing the S-GW resource needs to be added in the second network, that is, in the second P-
  • the GW sends a delete bearer request to the second S-GW, and the second S-GW sends a delete bearer response to the second P-GW; or, After transmitting the forwarding relocation response to the second MME, the second E sends a deletion session request to the second S-GW, and the second S-GW sends a deletion session response to the second MME.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the UE performs handover between networks of different cells, where the networks before and after UE handover are DMM networks, and Local gateway L-GW and MME in the first D-network connected by the current UE There is an interface between them.
  • the second L-GW in the second DMM network is When the UE is connected, the UE is assigned an IP address.
  • the UE may continue to use the IP address assigned by the second L-GW.
  • Step 801 The first base station and the first base station Decision-making trigger switching is performed between the third base stations.
  • the first base station in this embodiment is the base station to which the UE is currently connected, that is, the first base station is in the first D-network
  • the third base station is the base station that the UE last connected before switching to the first base station, that is, the third base station.
  • the first base station and the third base station trigger the handover according to the measurement result of the wireless link.
  • Step 802 The third base station sends a handover request to a third MME corresponding to the third base station.
  • the third MME corresponding to the third eNB may be that the third MME may serve the UE connected to the third eNB
  • the first MME corresponding to the first eNB may be that the first MME may be Serving with the UE connected to the first base station.
  • Step 803 The third MME sends a forwarding relocation request to the first MME.
  • the forwarding relocation request carries UE context information.
  • Step 804 The first E sends a create session request to the first L-GW.
  • the create session request carries a second L-GW address.
  • Step 805 The first L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF.
  • the L-GW if dynamic PCC is deployed, the L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment procedure to the PCRF, and obtains PCC policy information of the UE.
  • Step 806 The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or a modify bearer request to the second L-GW.
  • Step 808 The first L-GW sends a create session response to the first MME.
  • Step 809 The first router sends a handover request to the first base station.
  • Step 810 The first base station sends a handover request response to the first MME.
  • Step 81 The first MME sends a forwarding relocation response to the third MME.
  • Step 812 The third E sends a handover command to the third base station.
  • Step 813 The third base station sends a handover command to the UE.
  • Step 814 The UE sends a handover confirmation to the first base station.
  • Step 815 The first base station sends a handover notification to the first MME.
  • Step 816 The first E sends a modify bearer request to the first L-GW.
  • Step 817 The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first MME.
  • Step 818 The UE performs a tracking area update process.
  • the first L-GW sends a proxy binding update to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, the step 807.
  • the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response message to the first L-GW to establish tunnel information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released.
  • the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
  • the step 806 and the step 807 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 may further perform the step: the third L-GW receives the BRI message sent by the second L-GW, and deletes the EPS bearer related to the PDN connection. Contextual information. Or the release of the third L-GW resource may be performed by the step 81 1 and the step 812: the third L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the third MME, and deletes the EPS bearer related to the PDN connection. Contextual information. It should be noted that if the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
  • the first L-GW sends a modify bearer request to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, step 807, the second L- The GW sends a modify bearer response message to the first L_GW to establish bearer information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released.
  • the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
  • a step may be further performed between the step 81 1 and the step 812 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 : the third L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the third MME, and deletes the EPS about the PDN connection. Host context information.
  • the basic principle of the UE handover method is basically the same as the basic principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. 8. The difference is that the third L-GW corresponds.
  • the following steps may be performed: - The GW sends a delete bearer request to the third S-GW, and the third S-GW sends a delete bearer response to the third P-GW; or, after the first MME sends the forward relocation response to the third MME, the third MME Sending a delete session request to the third S-GW, and transmitting a delete session response to the third MME by the third S-GW. If the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
  • the second L-GW is equivalent to the P-GW, and the process of releasing the S-GW resource needs to be added in the second network, that is, in the second P-
  • the GW sends a delete bearer request to the second S-GW, and the second S-GW sends a delete bearer response to the second P-GW; or, After transmitting the forwarding relocation response to the second MME, the second E sends a deletion session request to the second S-GW, and the second S-GW sends a deletion session response to the second MME.
  • the process of the UE switching in the subsequent EPS network may be performed according to the EPS process.
  • a reconstruction process in which the UE switches from the second DMM network to the third EPS network is described.
  • the first applicable scenario is that the second MME in the second D-network does not know whether the second base station supports the D-network, and the process is basically the same as the embodiment shown in FIG. 7.
  • the difference is that The first L-GW corresponds to the P-GW.
  • the second MME in the second DMM network knows that the second base station supports the DMM network, and the process is basically the same as the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, except that the first L-GW corresponds to the P-GW.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a signaling process of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the UE performs handover between networks of different cells, where the networks before and after UE handover are DMM networks, and There is no interface between the local gateway L-GW and the MME in the first D-network of the current UE connection.
  • the UE when the UE is in the ECM-IDLE state, the UE switches from the second DMM network cell to the third DMM network cell, and then switches to the first DMM network cell that is currently connected with the UE, in the second DMM network.
  • the second L-GW is connected to the UE, the UE is assigned an IP address.
  • the UE may continue to use the IP address allocated by the second L-GW.
  • the communication method may specifically include the following steps:
  • Step 901 The UE performs a tracking area update trigger.
  • Step 902 The UE sends a tracking area update request to the first base station.
  • Step 903 The first base station sends a tracking area update request to the first MME, where the tracking area update request carries the Dili identifier.
  • Step 904 The first MME sends a context request to the third MME to request the context information of the UE.
  • Step 905 The third MME sends a context response to the first MME, where the context response carries context information of the UE in the third MME.
  • Step 906 The first MME sends a bearer setup request to the first base station, where the bearer setup request carries the EPS bearer context list, that is, the EPS bearer context information including the PDN connection to be established.
  • the bearer setup request carries the EPS bearer context list, that is, the EPS bearer context information including the PDN connection to be established.
  • Step 907 The first base station sends a create session request to the first L-GW.
  • the create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW, where the second L-GW is in the second DMM network, and the IP address allocated by the second L-GW to the UE can always be Used by the UE.
  • Step 908 The first L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF.
  • the L-GW if dynamic PCC is deployed, the L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF, and obtains PCC policy information of the UE.
  • Step 909 The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or a modify bearer request to the second L-GW to establish a connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • Step 910 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the first L-GW.
  • Step 912 The first base station sends a bearer setup response to the first MME.
  • Step 913 The first MME sends a context response to the third MME.
  • Step 914 The first E sends an update location to the HSS.
  • Step 915 The HSS sends a delete location to the third MME to delete the context of the UE in the third MME.
  • Step 916 The third ray sends a delete location response to the HSS.
  • Step 917 The HSS sends an update location response to the first MME.
  • Step 918 The first E sends a tracking area update acceptance to the UE.
  • the first L-GW sends a proxy binding update to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, the step 910.
  • the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response message to the first L-GW to establish a connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released.
  • the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
  • the step 909 and the step 910 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 may further perform the step: the third L-GW receives the binding revocation indication message sent by the second L-GW, and deletes the PDN connection.
  • the EPS carries context information.
  • the release of the third L-GW resource may be performed by the step 913 and the step 914: the third E sends a deactivation bearer request to the third base station, where the deactivation bearer request carries the operation identifier (Operat i on Indicating), to inform the third base station that only the EPS bearer resource of the reconstructed PDN connected to the third L-GW needs to be deleted, and then the third base station sends a delete session request to the third L-GW, and then deletes EPS bearer context information about this PDN connection. It should be noted that if the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
  • the first L-GW sends a modify bearer request to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, step 910, the second L- The GW sends a modify bearer response message to the first L-GW to establish a connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released.
  • the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
  • the step 912 and the step 913 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 may further perform the step of: the third E sends a deactivation bearer request to the third base station, where the deactivation bearer request carries the operation identifier In order to inform the third base station that the EPS bearer resource of the reconstructed PDN connection on the third L-GW needs to be deleted, and then the third base station sends a delete session request to the third L-GW, and then delete the EPS bearer context about the PDN connection. information.
  • the basic principle of the UE handover method is basically the same as the basic principle of the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the P-GW sends a delete bearer request to the third S-GW, and then the third S-GW sends a delete bearer response to the third P-GW; or, after the first MME sends the context response to the third MME, the third The MME sends a delete session request to the third S-GW, and the third S-GW sends a delete session response to the third MME.
  • the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
  • the second L-GW is equivalent to the P-GW, and the process of releasing the S-GW resource needs to be added in the second network, that is, in the second P-GW.
  • the second MME After receiving the proxy binding update or modifying the bearer request sent by the first L-GW, sending a delete bearer request to the second S-GW, and sending, by the second S-GW, the delete bearer response to the second P-GW; or, the first After the MME sends the context response to the second MME, the second MME sends a delete session request to the second S_GW, and the second S-GW sends a delete session response to the second MME.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention. as shown in FIG. 10,
  • the UE performs handover between networks of different cells, where the networks before and after the UE handover are all DMM networks, and an interface is set between the local gateway L-GW and the MME in the first D-network connected by the current UE. .
  • the UE switches from the second DMM network cell to the third DMM network cell, and then switches to the first DMN network cell that is currently connected with the UE, and the second DMM network
  • the UE is assigned an IP address
  • the UE switches to the currently connected first DMM network cell, the UE may continue to use the IP address allocated by the second L-GW.
  • the communication method may specifically include the following steps:
  • Step 1001 The UE performs a tracking area update trigger.
  • Step 1002 The UE sends a tracking area update request to the first base station.
  • Step 1003 The first base station sends a tracking area update request to the first MME, where the tracking area update request carries the Dili identifier and the address identifier of the first L-GW.
  • Step 1004 The first MME sends a context request to the third MME to request the uplink information of the UE.
  • Step 1005 The third MME sends a context response to the first MME, where the context response carries Context information with the UE in the third MME.
  • Step 1006 The first MME sends a create session request to the first L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW, where the second L-GW is in the second DMM network, and the The IP address allocated by the second L-GW to the UE can always be used by the UE during the UE handover process.
  • Step 1007 The first L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF.
  • the L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF, and obtains PCC policy information of the UE.
  • Step 1008 The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or a modify bearer request to the second L-GW to establish a connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • Step 1009 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the first L-GW.
  • Step 101 The first MME sends a context response to the third MME.
  • Step 1012 The first E sends an update location to the HSS.
  • Step 1013 The HSS sends the deletion location to the third MME.
  • the deletion location is used to delete the context of the UE in the third ray.
  • Step 1014 The third ray sends a delete location response to the HSS.
  • Step 1015 The HSS sends an update location response to the first MME.
  • Step 1016 The first E sends a tracking area update acceptance to the UE.
  • step 1008 the first L-GW sends a proxy binding update to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, the step 1009.
  • the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response message to the first L-GW to establish a connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released.
  • the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
  • a step may be further performed between the step 1008 and the step 1009 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10: the third L-GW receives the binding revocation indication message sent by the second L-GW, and deletes the PDN connection.
  • the EPS carries context information.
  • the release of the third L-GW resource may be further performed by the step 101 1 and the step 1012: the third E sends a delete session request to the third L-GW, and the EPS about the PDN connection is deleted. Host context information. It should be noted that if the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
  • the first L-GW sends a modify bearer request to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, step 1009, the second L- The GW sends a modify bearer response message to the first L-GW to establish a connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released.
  • the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
  • Steps may be further performed between step 101 1 and step 1012 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10: the third E sends a delete session request to the third L-GW, and then the EPS bearer context about the PDN connection is deleted. information.
  • the basic principle of the UE handover method is basically the same as the basic principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. 10, except that the third L-GW corresponds to the P-GW.
  • the third P-GW may perform the following steps: The third S-GW sends a delete bearer request, and the third S-GW sends a delete bearer response to the third P-GW; or, after the first MME sends a context response to the third MME, the third MME sends the third S-GW to the third S-GW. Sending a delete session request, and the third S-GW sends a delete session response to the third MME. If the UE switches directly from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
  • the second L-GW is equivalent to the P-GW, and the process of releasing the S-GW resource needs to be added in the second network, that is, in the second P-GW.
  • the process of the UE switching in the subsequent EPS network may be according to the EPS process of the prior art. That is, therefore, the UE is switched from the second DMM network here.
  • the process of the UE switching from the second DMM network to the third EPS network is basically the same as the embodiment shown in FIG. 10, except that the first L-GW corresponds to the P-GW, and the tracking area update request is received in step 1003.
  • the Dili logo and the address identifier of the first L-GW are not carried in the middle.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG.
  • the UE may perform handover between different base stations, that is, the first base station and the third base station, and the first base station and the third base station correspond to the same L-GW.
  • An applicable scenario in this embodiment is that the interface is not configured between the first eNB and the first MME, where the communication method includes:
  • Step 1 101 The first base station sends a modify bearer request to the first L-GW.
  • the modified bearer request is used to update the IP address and the TEID of the downlink data transmission of the UE in the first L-GW, that is, the information of the third base station in the first L-GW is modified as the first base station.
  • Ft is self-defeating.
  • Step 1 102 The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first base station.
  • Step 1 103 The first base station sends a path switch request to the first node.
  • path switching request carries the Dili identifier.
  • Step 1 104 The first base station receives a path switch response sent by the first port.
  • Step 1 105 The first base station sends a resource release request to the third base station.
  • the resource release request causes the second base station to release resources with the UE.
  • Step 1 106 The UE performs a tracking area update process.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • a UE may perform handover between different base stations, that is, a first base station and a third base station, and the first base station and the third base station Corresponding to the same L-GW.
  • An applicable scenario in this embodiment is that an interface is configured between the first base station and the first MME, where the communication method includes:
  • Step 1201 The first base station sends a path switch request to the first MME, where the path switch request carries the Dili identifier and the address identifier of the first L-GW.
  • Step 1202 The first MME sends a modify bearer request to the first L-GW.
  • the modified bearer request is used to update the IP address and the TEID of the downlink data transmission of the UE in the first L-GW, that is, the information of the third base station in the first L-GW is modified to be the first base station. Information.
  • Step 1203 The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first MME.
  • Step 1204 The first switch sends a path switch response to the first base station.
  • Step 1205 The first base station sends a resource release request to the third base station.
  • the resource release request causes the third base station to release resources between the UE and the UE, that is, to release resources between the UE and the third base station to which the UE is connected before switching to the first base station.
  • Step 1206 The UE performs a tracking area update process.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • a UE may perform handover between different base stations, that is, a first base station and a third base station, and the first base station and the third base station Corresponding to the same L-GW.
  • An application scenario in this embodiment is that the interface between the first eNB and the first MME is not set.
  • the communication method includes:
  • Step 1301 Perform a decision trigger switch between the first base station and the third base station.
  • Step 1302 The third base station sends a handover request to the third MME.
  • Step 1303 The third MME sends a forwarding relocation request to the first MME.
  • Step 1304 The first E sends a handover request to the first base station.
  • Step 1305 The first base station sends a handover request response to the first MME.
  • the handover request response carries a Dili identity.
  • Step 1306 The first ray sends a forwarding relocation response to the third ray E.
  • Step 1307 The third E sends a handover command to the third base station.
  • Step 1308 The third base station sends a handover command to the UE.
  • Step 1309 The UE sends a handover confirmation to the first base station.
  • Step 1310 The first base station sends a modify bearer request to the first L-GW.
  • the modified bearer request is used to update the IP address and the TEID of the downlink data transmission of the UE in the first L-GW, that is, the information of the third base station in the first L-GW is modified as the information of the first base station.
  • Step 131 The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first base station.
  • Step 1312 The first base station sends a handover notification to the first MME.
  • Step 1313 The UE performs a tracking area update process.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • a UE may perform handover between different base stations, that is, a first base station and a third base station, and the first base station Corresponding to the same L-GW as the third base station.
  • An application scenario in this embodiment is that an interface is configured between the first base station and the first MME, and the communication method includes:
  • the decision between the base station and the third base station is triggered to switch.
  • the second base station sends a handover request to the third MME.
  • the MME sends a forward relocation request to the first MME.
  • the MME sends a handover request to the first base station.
  • the second base station sends a handover request notification to the first MME.
  • the handover request notification carries the Dili identity and the first L-GW address identifier.
  • Step 1406 The first MME sends a forwarding relocation response to the third MME.
  • Step 1407 The third E sends a handover command to the third base station.
  • Step 1408 The third base station sends a handover command to the UE.
  • Step 1409 The UE sends a handover confirmation to the first base station.
  • Step 1410 The first base station sends a handover notification to the first MME.
  • Step 141 The first E sends a modify bearer request to the first L-GW.
  • the modified bearer request is used to update the IP address and the TEID of the downlink data transmission of the UE in the first L-GW, that is, the information of the third base station in the first L-GW is modified as the information of the first base station.
  • Step 1412 The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first MME.
  • Step 1413 The UE performs a tracking area update process.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a signaling procedure of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the applicable scenario in this embodiment is that a UE performs handover between different cells, and the network architectures of the cells are the same, that is, The D-network, and after the UE establishes a PDN connection with the current cell, the UE may initiate a PDN connection to connect, and may release a PDN connection that the UE no longer needs.
  • the UE releases the tunnel or bearer information of the L_GW between the DMM network currently connected by the UE and the D-network connected to the UE, that is, the resource between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • the resource release between the first L-GW and the second L-GW may include the following steps:
  • Step 1501 The UE sends a PDN connection to the MME to connect to the MME.
  • the MME in this embodiment corresponds to the first L-GW.
  • the UE may send a PDN connection de-connection request to the MME through the base station, where the PDN connection de-connection request is used to connect the UE to the second L_GW.
  • a PDN connection between the second L-GW and the L_GW connected before the UE connects to the current DMM network.
  • Step 1502 The MME sends a deactivation bearer request to the base station.
  • the base station is a base station currently connected to the UE, and the MME sends a deactivation bearer request to the base station that forwards the PDN connection to the connection request.
  • Step 1503 The base station sends a delete session request to the first L-GW.
  • Step 1504 The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW.
  • the proxy binding update carries the IP address assigned by the second L-GW to the UE, to delete the IP address.
  • deleting the session request includes an LBI (Linked EPS Bearer Identifier), which is used to delete the PDN connection whose default bearer identifier is LBI between the first L_GW and the second L_GW.
  • LBI Linked EPS Bearer Identifier
  • Step 1505 The second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination process to the PCRF.
  • the second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
  • Step 1506 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes the session response to the first L-GW.
  • Step 1508 The base station sends RRC connection reconfiguration information to the UE, to modify the air interface signaling connection.
  • Step 1509 The UE sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the base station.
  • Step 1510 The base station sends a deactivation bearer response to the MME.
  • the deactivation bearer response is used to inform the MN that the PDN connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW has been deleted.
  • Step 1511 The UE sends a direct transmission message to the base station.
  • the direct transmission message carries a deactivated EPS bearer context accept message.
  • Step 1512 The base station sends a deactivated EPS bearer context accept message to the MME.
  • the UE may also switch between cells of different network architectures, that is, switch between the EPS network and the Dali network, whether the UE is currently connected to the DMM network, or the UE is currently connected to the EPS network.
  • the principle is basically similar to the principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. 15, except that the second L-GW corresponds to the P-GW or the first L-GW corresponds to the P_GW.
  • the detachment of the PDN connection may also be initiated by the MME. For example, when the UE subscribes to data modification or lack of resources, the MME decides to release the PDN connection of the UE.
  • the PDN connection may be initiated by the UE to connect to the connection, or the MME may trigger the PDN connection to connect.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of a signaling procedure of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the applicable scenario in this embodiment is that a UE performs handover between different cells, and the network architectures of the cells are the same, that is, The D-network, and after the UE establishes a PDN connection with the current cell, the UE may initiate a PDN connection to connect, and may release a PDN connection that the UE no longer needs.
  • the UE releases the tunnel or bearer information of the L_GW between the DMM network currently connected by the UE and the D-network connected to the UE, that is, the resource between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • the resource release between the first L-GW and the second L-GW may include the following steps:
  • Step 1601 The UE sends a PDN connection to the MME through the base station to connect to the MME.
  • the UE sends a PDN connection de-connection request to the MME through a base station connected to the UE, where the PDN connection de-connection request is used to connect the PDN connection between the UE and the second L-GW, where the second L-GW is the UE. Connect to the L-GW connected before the current Delicate network.
  • the detachment of the PDN connection may also be initiated by the MME. For example, when the UE subscribes to data modification or lack of resources, the MME decides to release the PDN connection of the UE.
  • the PDN connection may be initiated by the UE to connect to the connection, or the MME may trigger the PDN connection to connect.
  • Step 1602 The MME sends a delete session request to the first L-GW.
  • Step 1603 The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW.
  • the proxy binding update carries the IP address assigned by the second L-GW to the UE, to delete the IP address.
  • deleting the session request includes an LBI, and deleting the PDN connection with the default bearer identifier LBI between the first L_GW and the second L-GW.
  • Step 1604 The second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
  • the L-GW if dynamic PCC is deployed, the L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
  • Step 1605 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW.
  • Step 1606 The first L-GW sends a delete session response to the MME.
  • the MME is an MME corresponding to the first L-GW, and the first L_GW sends a delete session response to the MME, in response to deleting the session request.
  • Step 1607 The MME sends a deactivation bearer request to the base station.
  • the base station is connected to the first L-GW, that is, the base station corresponding to the first L-GW.
  • the deactivation bearer request is used to deactivate all bearers of the PDN connection between the UE and the MME.
  • the base station is a base station that forwards the PDN connection de-connection request in step 1601.
  • Step 1608 The base station sends RRC connection reconfiguration information to the UE, to modify the air interface signaling connection.
  • Step 1609 The UE sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the base station.
  • the UE sends the RRC connection reconfiguration complete information to the base station, thereby completing the reconfiguration of the RRC connection between the UE and the base station.
  • Step 1610 The base station sends a deactivation bearer response to the MME.
  • Step 161 The UE sends a direct transmission message to the base station.
  • the direct transmission message carries a deactivated EPS bearer context accept message.
  • Step 1612 The base station sends a deactivation bearer context accept message to the MME.
  • the UE may also switch between cells of different network architectures, that is, switch between the EPS network and the Dali network.
  • the principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. Basically the same, the difference is that the second L-GW corresponds to the P-GW, and the rest of the same parts will not be described again.
  • the principle is basically the same as that of the embodiment shown in FIG. 16. The difference is that the first L-GW corresponds to the S-GW or the P-GW. Specifically, in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • Step 1602 corresponds to the MME sending a delete session request to the P_GW through the S-GW
  • step 1603 corresponds to the P-GW sending a proxy binding update or deletion session request to the second L-GW, where the second L-GW For the L-GW to which the UE is previously connected, the rest of the same parts will not be described again.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a signaling procedure of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the applicable scenario of the present embodiment is that a UE performs handover between different cells, and the network architectures of the cells are the same, that is, The D-network, and after the UE establishes a PDN connection with the current cell, the UE may initiate a detach request to release the connection between the UE and the network.
  • the detaching of the UE may include the following steps: Step 1701: The UE initiates a detach request to the MME by using the base station.
  • the detach request is used to request detachment of the UE.
  • the MME is a MN corresponding to the first L-GW, and the current UE is connected to the first L-GW through the base station.
  • Step 1702 The MME sends a deactivation bearer request to the base station.
  • Each deactivation bearer request includes an LBI for deactivating a PDN connection between the UE and the L-GW with a default bearer identifier of LBI.
  • Step 1703 The base station sends a delete session request to the corresponding first L-GW, so that the corresponding first L-GW deletes the established PDN connection.
  • Step 1704 The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW.
  • the proxy binding update carries the IP address assigned by the second L-GW to the UE, to delete the IP address.
  • deleting the session request includes an LBI (Linked EPS Bearer Identifier), which is used to delete the PDN connection whose default bearer identifier is LBI between the first L_GW and the second L_GW.
  • LBI Linked EPS Bearer Identifier
  • Step 1705 The second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination process to the PCRF.
  • the second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
  • Step 1706 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW.
  • Step 1708 The base station sends a deactivation bearer response to the MME to respond to the deactivation of the bearer request.
  • Step 1709 The MME sends a detach accept message to the UE by using the base station.
  • Step 1710 Perform RRC connection release between the base station and the UE.
  • the MME indicates that the air interface signaling connection is released between the base station and the UE through the UE context release command (UE Context Release Co ⁇ and), and then the base station informs the MME that the RRC connection is successful through the UE Context Release Complete message. freed.
  • UE Context Release Co ⁇ and UE Context Release Co ⁇ and
  • the UE may also switch between cells of different network architectures, that is, switch between the EPS network and the DMM network, regardless of whether the UE is currently connected to the DMM network, or The UE is currently connected to the EPS network, and the principle is basically similar to the principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. 17, except that the second L-GW corresponds to the P-GW or the first L-GW corresponds to the P_GW.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of a signaling procedure of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the applicable scenario is that the UE performs handover between different cells, and the network architectures of the cells are the same, that is, D
  • the UE may initiate a detach request to release the connection between the UE and the network.
  • the detaching of the UE may include the following steps: Step 1801 The UE initiates a detach request to the MME by using the base station.
  • Step 1802 The MME sends a delete session request to the first L-GW.
  • the delete session request causes the first L-GW to delete the established PDN connection.
  • Step 1803 The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW.
  • the proxy binding update carries the IP address assigned by the second L-GW to the UE, to delete the IP address.
  • Corresponding PDN connection Or deleting the LBI included in the session request to delete the PDN connection with the default bearer identifier LBI between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • Step 1804 The second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
  • the second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
  • Step 1805 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes the session response to the first L-GW.
  • Step 1807 The MME sends a detach accept message to the UE.
  • Step 1808 Perform an RRC connection release between the base station and the UE.
  • the MME indicates that the air interface signaling connection is released between the base station and the UE through the UE context release command (UE Context Rel ease Co and ), and then the base station informs the MME that the RRC connection is successful through the UE Context Release Complete message. freed.
  • the UE may also switch between cells of different network architectures, that is, switch between the EPS network and the Dali network.
  • the UE is currently connected to the DMM network, the principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. basically the same, the difference is that the second L-GW corresponds to the P-GW, and the rest of the same parts will not be described again.
  • the UE is currently connected to the EPS network, the principle is basically the same as that of the embodiment shown in FIG. 18, except that the first L-GW corresponds to the S-GW or the P-GW. Specifically, FIG.
  • Step 1802 in the illustrated embodiment corresponds to the MME sending a delete session request to the P_GW through the S-GW, and then, in step 1803, the P-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW, where The second L-GW is the L-GW connected before the UE, and the rest of the same parts are not described again.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of a signaling procedure of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the applicable scenario is that the UE performs handover between different cells, and the network architectures of the cells are the same, that is, D The network, and after the UE establishes a PDN connection with the current cell, the MME may initiate a detach request to release the connection between the UE and the network.
  • the detaching of the UE may include the following steps: Step 1901: The MME initiates a detach request to the UE by using the base station.
  • the detach request is used to notify the UE to attach.
  • Step 1902 The MME sends a deactivation bearer request to the base station.
  • Step 1903 The base station sends a delete session request to the corresponding first L-GW.
  • the delete session request causes the corresponding L-GW to delete the established PDN connection.
  • Step 1904 The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW.
  • the proxy binding update session request carries a proxy binding deletion session request to delete the first L-GW and the first The bearer between the two L-GWs, that is, the first L-GW sends a delete session request for each PDN connection.
  • Each delete session request includes an LBI for deleting a PDN connection whose default bearer identifier is LBI between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • Step 1905 The second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination process to the PCRF.
  • the second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
  • Step 1906 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes the session response to the first L-GW.
  • Step 1908 The base station sends a deactivation bearer response to the MME to respond to the deactivation of the bearer request.
  • Step 1909 The UE sends a detach accept message to the MME by using the base station.
  • Step 1910 Perform an RRC connection release between the base station and the UE.
  • the MME indicates the air interface between the base station and the UE through the UE context release command.
  • the signaling connection is released, and then the base station informs the LG ERRC connection to be successfully released through the UE context release completion message.
  • the UE may also switch between cells of different network architectures, that is, switch between the EPS network and the Dali network, whether the UE is currently connected to the DMM network, or the UE is currently connected to the EPS network.
  • the principle is basically similar to the principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. 19, except that the second L-GW corresponds to the P-GW.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of a signaling procedure of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the applicable scenario is that the UE performs handover between different cells, and the network architectures of the cells are the same, that is, D
  • the MME may initiate a detach request to release the connection between the UE and the DMM network.
  • the detaching of the UE may include the following steps: Step 2001: The MME initiates a detach request to the UE by using the eNB, and the detach request is used to notify the UE. Go to the attachment.
  • Step 2002 The MME sends a delete session request to the first L-GW.
  • the delete session request causes the first L-GW to delete the established PDN connection.
  • Step 2003 The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW.
  • the proxy binding update carries the IP address assigned by the second L-GW to the UE, to delete the IP address.
  • Corresponding PDN connection Or deleting the LBI included in the session request to delete the PDN connection with the default bearer identifier LBI between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
  • Step 2004 The second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
  • the second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
  • Step 2005 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes the session response to the first L-GW.
  • Step 2007 The UE sends a detach accept message to the MME.
  • Step 2008 The RRC connection is released between the base station and the UE.
  • the MME indicates that the air interface signaling connection between the base station and the UE is released by using the UE context release command (UE Context Rel ease Co and ), and then the base station releases through the UE context.
  • the UE Context Relity Complete message informs the MME that the RRC connection is successfully released.
  • the UE may also switch between cells of different network architectures, that is, switch between the EPS network and the Dali network. If the UE is currently connected to the DMM network, the principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. Basically the same, the difference is that the second L-GW corresponds to the P-GW, and the rest of the same parts will not be described again.
  • the principle is the same as that of the embodiment shown in FIG. 20, except that the first L-GW corresponds to the S-GW or the P-GW.
  • Step 2002 corresponds to the MME sending a delete session request to the P_GW through the S-GW, and then, in step 2003, the P-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW, where the second L-GW For the L-GW connected to the previous UE, the rest of the same parts will not be described again.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the L-GW includes: a receiving module 2101, a processing module 2102, and a sending module 2103. among them,
  • the receiving module 2101 is configured to receive a create session request, where the session request carries an address identifier of the second local gateway L-GW or an address identifier of the packet data network gateway P-GW, where the second L-GW and the P-GW are users.
  • the device UE is connected to the L-GW before being connected, and the UE is currently connected to the L_GW;
  • the processing module 2102 is configured to establish a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request.
  • the sending module 2103 is configured to send a create session response.
  • the receiving module 2101 is specifically configured to receive a create session request sent by the first base station corresponding to the L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW;
  • the processing module 2102 is specifically configured to establish a connection with the second L-GW according to the create session request.
  • the sending module 2103 is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first base station.
  • the receiving module 2101 is configured to receive a create session request sent by the first mobility management entity MME corresponding to the L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW;
  • the processing module 2102 is specifically configured to establish a connection with the second L-GW according to the create session request.
  • the sending module 2103 is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first MME.
  • the receiving module 2101 is specifically configured to receive the first base station corresponding to the L-GW. Sending a session request, creating a session request including an address identifier of the P-GW;
  • the processing module 2102 is specifically configured to establish a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request.
  • the sending module 2103 is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first base station.
  • the receiving module 2101 is configured to receive a create session request sent by the first mobility management entity MME corresponding to the first L-GW, where the session request includes an address identifier of the P-GW.
  • the processing module 2102 is specifically configured to establish a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request.
  • the sending module 2103 is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first MME.
  • the sending module 2103 is further configured to send a proxy binding update or modify a bearer request to the second L-GW;
  • the receiving module 2101 is further configured to receive a proxy binding response sent by the second L-GW or modify the bearer response.
  • the sending module 2103 is further configured to send a proxy binding update or modify a bearer request to the P-GW;
  • the receiving module 2101 is further configured to receive a proxy binding response sent by the P-GW or modify the bearer response.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the L-GW includes: a receiving module 2201, a processing module 2202, and a sending module 2203. among them,
  • the receiving module 2201 is configured to receive a proxy binding update or modify a bearer request, where the local gateway L-GW is configured to switch to the first L-GW or the packet data network gateway P_GW before the processing module 2202
  • the proxy binding updates or modifies the bearer request establishing a connection with the first L-GW or the P-GW;
  • the sending module 2203 is configured to send a proxy binding response or modify a bearer response.
  • the receiving module 2201 is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding sent by the first L-GW to update or modify the bearer request.
  • the processing module 2202 is specifically configured to establish a connection with the first L-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request.
  • the sending module 2203 is specifically configured to send a proxy binding response or modify a bearer response to the first L-GW.
  • the receiving module 2201 is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding update sent by the P-GW. Or modify the bearer request;
  • the processing module 2202 is specifically configured to establish a connection with the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request.
  • the sending module 2203 is specifically configured to send a proxy binding response or modify a bearer response to the P-GW. Further, the receiving module 2201 is further configured to receive a proxy binding update sent by the first L-GW or delete the session request;
  • the processing module 2202 is further configured to delete the connection with the first L-GW.
  • the sending module 2203 is further configured to send a proxy binding response or delete the session response to the first L-GW.
  • the receiving module 2201 is further configured to receive a proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the P-GW;
  • the processing module 2202 is further configured to delete the connection between the P-GW and the P-GW.
  • the sending module 2203 is further configured to send a proxy binding response or delete the session response to the P-GW.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 23, the L-GW includes: a receiving module 2301, a processing module 2302, and a sending module 2303. among them,
  • the receiving module 2301 is configured to receive a proxy binding update or delete a session request.
  • the processing module 2302 is configured to delete the connection between the first local gateway L-GW or the connection with the packet data network gateway P-GW, where the first L-GW is currently connected by the user equipment UE, L-GW or The P-GW is connected before the UE connects to the first L-GW;
  • the sending module 2303 is configured to send a proxy binding response or delete a session response.
  • the receiving module 2301 is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding sent by the first L-GW to update or delete the session request.
  • the processing module 2302 is specifically configured to delete the connection with the first L-GW, where the first L-GW is currently connected by the user equipment UE, and the L-GW is connected before the UE connects to the first L-GW;
  • the sending module 2303 is configured to send a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW, so that the first L-GW sends a delete session response to the first base station or the first MME corresponding to the first L-GW.
  • the receiving module 2301 is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding update sent by the P-GW or delete the session request.
  • the processing module 2302 is specifically configured to delete the connection with the P-GW, where the first L_GW is a user.
  • the device is currently connected to the UE, and the P-GW is connected before the UE connects to the first L-GW;
  • the sending module 2303 is specifically configured to send a delete session response to the P-GW, so that the P-GW is
  • the first serving gateway corresponding to the P-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes the session response.
  • the receiving module 2301 is further configured to receive a modified bearer request sent by the first L-GW;
  • the sending module 2303 is further configured to send a modify bearer response to the first L-GW.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the L-GW includes: a receiving module 2401, a processing module 2402, and a sending module 2403. among them,
  • the receiving module 2401 is configured to receive a modify bearer request.
  • the processing module 2402 is configured to change the stored current serving node information of the UE from the second base station information to the first base station information, where the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same local gateway;
  • the sending module 2403 is configured to send a modify bearer response.
  • the receiving module 2401 is specifically configured to receive a modified bearer request sent by the first base station
  • the sending module 2403 is specifically configured to send a modify bearer response to the first base station.
  • the receiving module 2401 is specifically configured to receive a modified bearer request sent by the first MME;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to send a modified bearer response to the first MME.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of a mobility management entity according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the L-GW includes: a receiving module 2501, a processing module 2502, and a sending module 2503.
  • the user equipment switches from the second base station to the first base station,
  • the receiving module 2501 is configured to receive a path switching request sent by the corresponding first base station, where the path switching request carries a distributed mobility management Dali identifier and a first local gateway L-GW address, and the path switching request is used to make the first L-
  • the GW modifies the information of the second base station stored in the first L-GW to the information of the first base station, where the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same first L-GW;
  • the processing module 2502 is configured to switch, according to the path switching request, the path of the first base station to be connected to the first L-GW by the first base station;
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the local gateway L-GW includes: a transmitter 2601, a receiver 2602, a memory 2603, and a transmitter 2601, a receiver 2602, and The processor 2604 is connected to the memory 2603.
  • the memory 2603 stores a set of program codes, and the processor 2604 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory 2603 to execute the communication method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 of the present invention.
  • the L-GW of this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution of the embodiment of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the L-GW includes: a transmitter 2701, a receiver 2702, a memory 2703, and a transmitter 2701, a receiver 2702, and a memory 2703, respectively.
  • the connected processor 2704 wherein the memory 2703 stores a set of program codes, and the processor 2704 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory 2703 to execute the communication method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 of the present invention.
  • the L-GW of the present embodiment can be used to perform the technical solution of the embodiment of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the L_GW includes: a transmitter 2801, a receiver 2802, a memory 2803, and a transmitter 2801, a receiver 2802, and a memory 2803, respectively.
  • the processor 2804 is configured to store a set of program codes in the memory 2803, and the processor 2804 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory 2803 to execute the communication method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 of the present invention.
  • the L-GW of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the embodiment of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the L-GW includes: a transmitter 2901, a receiver 2902, a memory 2903, and a transmitter 2901, a receiver 2902, and a memory 2903, respectively.
  • the connected processor 2904 wherein the memory 2903 stores a set of program codes, and the processor 2904 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory 2903 to execute the communication method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 of the present invention.
  • the L-GW of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the embodiment of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic structural diagram of an MME according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the L-GW includes: a transmitter 3001, a receiver 3002, a memory 3003, and a transmitter 3001, respectively.
  • the processor 3004 is connected to the processor 3003, wherein the memory 3003 stores a set of program codes, and the processor 3004 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory 3003 to perform the communication provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 of the present invention. method.
  • the L-GW of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the embodiment of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.

Abstract

Provided are a communication method, a communication device, and a communication system. In the communication method, a first local gateway (L-GW) receives a create session request, said request carrying an address identifier of a second L-GW or an address identifier of a packet data network gateway (P-GW); the first L-GW, according to the create session request, establishes a connection with the second L-GW or with the P-GW, thereby completing the connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, or completing the connection between the first L-GW and the P-GW; the first L-GW sends a create session response, thus switching a UE between different networks.

Description

通信方法、 通信装置及通信系统  Communication method, communication device and communication system
技术领域 本发明涉及通信技术, 尤其涉及一种通信方法、 通信装置及通信系统。 背景技术 现有的演进分组系统 (Evolved Packet System, 以下简称 EPS ) 架构 是集中式移动性管理, 在 EPS架构中, 当终端设备 UE初始附着时, UE向 所在小区的基站 eNB发送附着请求信息, 接着, eNB根据该附着请求信息 选择 UE可以附着的移动性管理实体 (Mobi l ity Management Entity, 以 下简称 MME) , 并由 MME选择可以附着的服务网关 (Serving Gateway, 以 下简称 S-GW) 和分组数据网网关 (Packet Data Network Gateway, 以下 简称 P-GW) , 并且, P-GW为该 UE分配 IP地址, 即在 UE与该 P-GW之间 建立 EPS承载, 并认为是 EPS默认承载。 TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method, a communication device, and a communication system. The existing Evolved Packet System (hereinafter referred to as EPS) architecture is centralized mobility management. In the EPS architecture, when the terminal device UE initially attaches, the UE sends the attachment request information to the base station eNB of the cell in which it is located. Then, the eNB selects a Mobility Management Entity (hereinafter referred to as MME) to which the UE can attach according to the attach request information, and selects, by the MME, a Serving Gateway (hereinafter referred to as S-GW) and a packet that can be attached. A Packet Data Network Gateway (P-GW), and the P-GW allocates an IP address to the UE, that is, an EPS bearer is established between the UE and the P-GW, and is considered to be an EPS default bearer.
若 P-GW产生故障或是安全问题, 则会产生通信系统中的单点故障及 单点安全的问题。 因此人们引进了分布式移动性管理 (Di stributed Mobi l ity Management , 以下简称 DMM) 网络, 即为现有 EPS网络的每个基 站设置一个与该基站对应的本地网关 (Local Gateway, 以下简称 L_GW) , 或者, 为现有 EPS 网络的多个基站设置一个与该多个基站同时对应的 L_GW。  If the P-GW fails or has a security problem, it will cause a single point of failure and a single point of security in the communication system. Therefore, the Distributed Mobility Management (DMM) network is introduced, that is, a local gateway (hereinafter referred to as L_GW) corresponding to the base station is set for each base station of the existing EPS network. Or, an L_GW corresponding to the multiple base stations is set for multiple base stations of the existing EPS network.
然而, 用户设备 UE无法在 EPS网络和 D匪网络共存的场景下, 或是不同 小区的 D匪网络的场景下进行网络的切换。 发明内容 本发明实施例提供一种通信方法、 通信装置及通信系统, 可以在 EPS 网络和 D匪网络共存的场景下, 或是不同小区的 D匪网络的场景下进行网络 的切换。  However, the user equipment UE cannot perform network switching in the scenario where the EPS network and the D network coexist, or in the scenario of the D匪 network of different cells. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The embodiments of the present invention provide a communication method, a communication device, and a communication system, which can perform network switching in a scenario where an EPS network and a D-network coexist, or in a scenario of a D-network of a different cell.
第一个方面, 本发明实施例提供一种通信方法, 包括: 第一本地网关 L-GW接收创建会话请求, 所述创建会话请求中携带有 第二 L-GW的地址标识或分组数据网网关 P-GW的地址标识,所述第二 L-GW、 所述 P-GW为用户设备 UE切换到所述第一 L-GW之前连接的, UE当前与所 述第一 L-GW连接; In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication method, including: The first local gateway L-GW receives the create session request, where the create session request carries the address identifier of the second L-GW or the address identifier of the packet data network gateway P-GW, the second L-GW, the The P-GW is connected before the user equipment UE switches to the first L-GW, and the UE is currently connected to the first L-GW;
所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 The first L-GW establishes with the second L-GW or the according to the create session request
P-GW之间的连接; a connection between P-GWs;
所述第一 L-GW发送创建会话响应。  The first L-GW sends a create session response.
在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一本地网关 L-GW接收创建会话 请求, 包括:  In a first possible implementation manner, the first local gateway L-GW receives a create session request, including:
所述第一 L-GW接收与所述第一 L-GW对应的第一基站发送的创建会话 请求, 所述创建会话请求包括所述第二 L-GW的地址标识;  The first L-GW receives a create session request sent by the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW;
所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接, 包括:  And establishing, by the first L-GW, a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the creating a session request, including:
所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW之间的连 接;  Establishing, by the first L-GW, a connection with the second L-GW according to the creation session request;
所述第一 L-GW发送创建会话响应, 包括:  The first L-GW sends a create session response, including:
所述第一 L-GW向所述第一基站发送创建会话响应。  The first L-GW sends a create session response to the first base station.
在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一本地网关 L-GW接收创建会话 请求, 包括:  In a second possible implementation, the first local gateway L-GW receives the create session request, including:
所述第一 L-GW接收与所述第一 L-GW对应的第一移动性管理实体 MME 发送的创建会话请求, 所述创建会话请求包括所述第二 L-GW的地址标识; 所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接, 包括:  The first L-GW receives a create session request sent by the first mobility management entity MME corresponding to the first L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW; The first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the creation session request, and includes:
所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW之间的连 接;  Establishing, by the first L-GW, a connection with the second L-GW according to the creation session request;
所述第一 L-GW发送创建会话响应, 包括:  The first L-GW sends a create session response, including:
所述第一 L-GW向所述第一 MME发送创建会话响应。  The first L-GW sends a create session response to the first MME.
在第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一本地网关 L-GW接收创建会话 请求, 包括:  In a third possible implementation, the first local gateway L-GW receives the create session request, including:
所述第一 L-GW接收与所述第一 L-GW对应的第一基站发送的创建会话 请求, 所述创建会话请求包括所述 P-GW的地址标识; The first L-GW receives a creation session sent by the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW Requesting, the creating a session request includes an address identifier of the P-GW;
所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接, 包括:  And establishing, by the first L-GW, a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the creating a session request, including:
所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述 P-GW之间的连接; 所述第一 L-GW发送创建会话响应, 包括:  The first L-GW establishes a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request; the first L-GW sends a create session response, including:
所述第一 L-GW向所述第一基站发送创建会话响应。  The first L-GW sends a create session response to the first base station.
在第四种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一本地网关 L-GW接收创建会话 请求, 包括:  In a fourth possible implementation, the first local gateway L-GW receives the create session request, including:
所述第一 L-GW接收与所述第一 L-GW对应的第一移动性管理实体 MME 发送的创建会话请求, 所述创建会话请求包括所述 P-GW的地址标识; 所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接, 包括:  The first L-GW receives a create session request sent by the first mobility management entity MME corresponding to the first L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the P-GW; And establishing, by the L-GW, a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the creating a session request, including:
所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述 P-GW之间的连接; 所述第一 L-GW发送创建会话响应, 包括:  The first L-GW establishes a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request; the first L-GW sends a create session response, including:
所述第一 L-GW向所述第一 MME发送创建会话响应。  The first L-GW sends a create session response to the first MME.
结合第一个方面至第一个方面的第二种可能的实现方式中的任意一 种, 在第五种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求 建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接, 包括:  With reference to any one of the first aspect to the second possible implementation of the first aspect, in a fifth possible implementation, the first L-GW establishes a The connection between the second L-GW or the P-GW includes:
所述第一 L-GW向所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或修改承载请求; 所述第一 L-GW接收所述第二 L-GW发送的代理绑定响应或修改承载响 应。  Sending, by the first L-GW, a proxy binding update or modifying a bearer request to the second L-GW; the first L-GW receiving a proxy binding response or modifying a bearer response sent by the second L-GW .
结合第一个方面、 第一个方面的第三种可能的实现方式或是第一个方 面的第四种可能的实现方式, 在第六种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一 L-GW 根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接, 包 括:  With reference to the first aspect, the third possible implementation of the first aspect, or the fourth possible implementation of the first aspect, in a sixth possible implementation, the first L-GW Establishing a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the creating a session request, including:
所述第一 L-GW向所述 P-GW发送代理绑定更新或修改承载请求; 所述第一 L-GW接收所述 P-GW发送的代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。 第二个方面, 本发明实施例提供一种通信方法, 包括:  Transmitting, by the first L-GW, a proxy binding update or modifying a bearer request to the P-GW; the first L-GW receiving a proxy binding response or modifying a bearer response sent by the P-GW. In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication method, including:
第二本地网关 L-GW 接收代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 所述第二 L-GW为用户设备 UE切换到所述第一 L-GW或分组数据网网关 P_GW之前连 接的; The second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request, and the second L-GW connects to the first L-GW or the packet data network gateway P_GW before the user equipment UE switches Pick up
所述第二 L-GW根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与所述 第一 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接;  The second L-GW establishes a connection with the first L-GW or the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify bearer request;
所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。  The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response.
在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述第二本地网关 L-GW接收代理绑定 更新或修改承载请求, 包括:  In a first possible implementation, the second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request, including:
第二本地网关 L-GW接收第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定更新或修改承载请 求;  The second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update sent by the first L-GW or modifies the bearer request;
所述第二 L-GW根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与所述 第一 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的承载, 包括:  The second L-GW establishes a bearer with the first L-GW or the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request, and includes:
所述第二 L-GW根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与所述 第一 L-GW之间的连接;  The second L-GW establishes a connection with the first L-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify bearer request;
所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应, 包括:  Sending, by the second L-GW, a proxy binding response or modifying a bearer response, including:
所述第二 L-GW向所述第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。 在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述第二本地网关 L-GW接收代理绑定 更新或修改承载请求, 包括:  The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the first L-GW. In a second possible implementation, the second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request, including:
第二本地网关 L-GW接收所述 P-GW发送的代理绑定更新或修改承载请 求;  Receiving, by the second local gateway, the proxy binding update or modifying the bearer request sent by the P-GW;
所述第二 L-GW根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与所述 第一 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接, 包括:  The second L-GW establishes a connection with the first L-GW or the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify bearer request, and includes:
所述第二 L-GW根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与所述 P-GW之间的连接;  The second L-GW establishes a connection with the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify bearer request;
所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应, 包括:  Sending, by the second L-GW, a proxy binding response or modifying a bearer response, including:
所述第二 L-GW向所述 P-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。  The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the P-GW.
结合第二个方面至第二个方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第三种可 能的实现方式中, 所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应之后, 还包括:  With reference to the second aspect, the first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a third possible implementation, after the sending, by the second L-GW, the proxy binding response or modifying the bearer response, the method further includes:
第二本地网关 L-GW接收第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除会话请 求;  The second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the first L-GW;
所述第二 L-GW删除和所述第一 L-GW之间的连接; 所述第二 L-GW向所述第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。 结合第二个方面或第二个方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 在第四种可 能的实现方式中, 所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应之后, 还包括: The second L-GW deletes a connection with the first L-GW; The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW. With the second aspect or the second possible implementation of the second aspect, in a fourth possible implementation, after the sending, by the second L-GW, the proxy binding response or modifying the bearer response, the method further includes:
第二本地网关 L-GW接收所述 P-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除会话请 求;  The second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the P-GW;
所述第二 L-GW删除和所述 P-GW之间的连接;  The second L-GW deletes a connection with the P-GW;
所述第二 L-GW向所述 P-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。  The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the P-GW.
第三个方面, 本发明实施例提供一种通信方法, 包括:  In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication method, including:
第二本地网关 L-GW接收代理绑定更新或删除会话请求;  The second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or deletes the session request;
所述第二 L-GW删除与第一 L-GW之间的连接或与分组数据网网关 P-GW 之间的连接, 所述第一 L-GW为用户设备 UE当前连接的, 所述第二 L-GW 或所述 P-GW为所述 UE连接所述第一 L-GW之前连接的;  The second L-GW deletes the connection with the first L-GW or the connection with the packet data network gateway P-GW, where the first L-GW is currently connected by the user equipment UE, a second L-GW or the P-GW connected before the UE is connected to the first L-GW;
所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。  The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes a session response.
在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述第二本地网关 L-GW接收代理绑定 更新或删除会话请求, 包括:  In a first possible implementation manner, the second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or deletes the session request, and includes:
所述第二 L-GW接收第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除会话请求; 所述第二 L-GW删除与第一 L-GW之间的连接或与 P-GW之间的连接, 包括:  The second L-GW receives a proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the first L-GW; the second L-GW deletes a connection with the first L-GW or with the P-GW Connections, including:
所述第二 L-GW删除与第一 L-GW之间的连接, 所述第一 L-GW为用户 设备 UE当前连接的, 所述第二 L-GW为所述 UE连接所述第一 L-GW之前连 接的;  The second L-GW deletes the connection with the first L-GW, where the first L-GW is currently connected by the user equipment UE, and the second L-GW is the first connection of the UE to the UE L-GW connected before;
所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应, 包括:  The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes the session response, including:
所述第二 L-GW向所述第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应, 以使所述第一 L-GW向所述第一 L-GW对应的第一基站或者第一 MME发送删 除会话响应。  Sending, by the second L-GW, a proxy binding response or deleting a session response to the first L-GW, to enable the first L-GW to reach the first base station or the first corresponding to the first L-GW The MME sends a delete session response.
在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述第二本地网关 L-GW接收代理绑定 更新或删除会话请求, 包括:  In a second possible implementation, the second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or deletes the session request, including:
所述第二 L-GW接收所述 P-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除会话请求; 所述第二 L-GW删除与 P-GW之间的连接, 包括: 所述第二 L-GW删除与所述 P-GW之间的连接, 所述第一 L-GW为用户 设备 UE当前连接的,所述 P-GW为所述 UE连接所述第一 L-GW之前连接的; 所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应, 包括: The second L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the P-GW; the second L-GW deletes the connection with the P-GW, including: The second L-GW deletes the connection with the P-GW, where the first L-GW is currently connected by the user equipment UE, and the P-GW connects the first L- to the UE. The GW is connected before; the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes the session response, including:
所述第二 L-GW向所述 P-GW发送删除会话响应, 以使所述 P-GW向与 所述 P-GW对应的第一服务网关 S-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。  Sending, by the second L-GW, a delete session response to the P-GW, to enable the P-GW to send a proxy binding response or delete a session response to the first serving gateway S-GW corresponding to the P-GW. .
结合第三个方面至第三个方面的第二种可能的实现方式中的任意一 种, 在第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述第二本地网关 L-GW接收第一 L-GW 发送的删除会话请求之前, 还包括:  With reference to any one of the third aspect to the second possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a third possible implementation manner, the second local gateway L-GW receives the first L-GW sending Before deleting the session request, it also includes:
所述第二 L-GW接收所述第一 L-GW发送的修改承载请求;  Receiving, by the second L-GW, a modified bearer request sent by the first L-GW;
所述第二 L-GW向所述第一 L-GW发送修改承载响应。  The second L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first L-GW.
第四个方面, 本发明实施例提供一种通信方法, 包括: 当用户设备 UE 从第二基站切换到第一基站时,  In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication method, including: when a user equipment UE is handed over from a second base station to a first base station,
第一本地网关 L-GW接收修改承载请求;  The first local gateway L-GW receives the modify bearer request;
所述第一 L-GW将存储的所述 UE当前服务节点信息由所述第二基站信 息改为第一基站信息, 所述第一基站和所述第二基站对应同一第一 L-GW; 所述第一 L-GW发送修改承载响应。  The first L-GW changes the stored current serving node information of the UE from the second base station information to the first base station information, where the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same first L-GW; The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response.
在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一 L-GW接收修改承载请求, 包 括:  In a first possible implementation, the first L-GW receives the modify bearer request, and includes:
所述第一 L-GW接收第一基站发送的修改承载请求;  Receiving, by the first L-GW, a modify bearer request sent by the first base station;
所述第一 L-GW发送修改承载响应, 包括:  The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response, including:
所述第一 L-GW向所述第一基站发送修改承载响应。  The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first base station.
在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一 L-GW接收修改承载请求, 包 括:  In a second possible implementation, the first L-GW receives the modify bearer request, and includes:
所述第一 L-GW接收第一 MME发送的修改承载请求;  Receiving, by the first L-GW, a modify bearer request sent by the first MME;
所述第一 L-GW发送修改承载响应, 包括:  The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response, including:
所述第一 L-GW向所述第一 MME发送修改承载响应。  The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first MME.
第五个方面, 本发明实施例提供一种通信方法, 包括: 当用户设备从 第二基站切换到第一基站时,  In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a communication method, including: when a user equipment is handed over from a second base station to a first base station,
第一移动性管理实体 MME接收对应的所述第一基站发送的路径切换请 求, 所述路径切换请求中携带有分布式移动性管理 D丽标识和第一本地网 关 L-GW地址, 所述路径切换请求以使第一 L-GW将所述第一 L-GW中存储 的第二基站的信息修改为第一基站的信息, 所述第一基站和所述第二基站 对应同一所述第一 L-GW; The first mobility management entity MME receives the path switch request sent by the first base station, where the path switch request carries the distributed mobility management Dali identifier and the first local network. Off the L-GW address, the path switching request, so that the first L-GW modifies information of the second base station stored in the first L-GW to information of the first base station, the first base station and the The second base station corresponds to the same first L-GW;
所述第一 MME根据所述路径切换请求切换所述第一基站的路径为所述 第一基站与所述第一 L-GW连接;  The path that the first MME switches to the first base station according to the path switching request is that the first base station is connected to the first L-GW;
所述第一丽 E向所述第一基站发送路径切换响应, 以使所述第一基站 通知所述第二基站进行资源释放。  The first router sends a path switch response to the first base station, so that the first base station notifies the second base station to perform resource release.
第六个方面, 本发明实施例提供一种本地网关, 包括:  In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway, including:
接收模块, 用于接收创建会话请求, 所述创建会话请求中携带有第二 本地网关 L-GW的地址标识或分组数据网网关 P-GW的地址标识, 所述第二 L-GW、 所述 P-GW为用户设备 UE切换到所述 L-GW之前连接的, UE当前与 所述 L-GW连接;  a receiving module, configured to receive a create session request, where the create session request carries an address identifier of the second local gateway L-GW or an address identifier of the packet data network gateway P-GW, the second L-GW, the The P-GW is connected before the user equipment UE switches to the L-GW, and the UE is currently connected to the L-GW;
处理模块, 用于根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接;  a processing module, configured to establish a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request;
发送模块, 用于发送创建会话响应。  A sending module, configured to send a create session response.
在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述接收模块, 具体用于接收与所述 L-GW对应的第一基站发送的创建会话请求,所述创建会话请求包括所述第 二 L-GW的地址标识;  In a first possible implementation manner, the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a create session request sent by the first base station corresponding to the L-GW, where the create session request includes the second L-GW Address identifier
所述处理模块,具体用于根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW 之间的连接;  The processing module is specifically configured to establish a connection with the second L-GW according to the creation session request;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一基站发送创建会话响应。  The sending module is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first base station.
在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述接收模块, 具体用于接收与所述 L-GW对应的第一移动性管理实体 MME发送的创建会话请求,所述创建会话 请求包括所述第二 L-GW的地址标识;  In a second possible implementation manner, the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a create session request sent by a first mobility management entity MME corresponding to the L-GW, where the create session request includes the second Address identifier of the L-GW;
所述处理模块,具体用于根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW 之间的连接;  The processing module is specifically configured to establish a connection with the second L-GW according to the creation session request;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一 MME发送创建会话响应。  The sending module is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first MME.
在第三种可能的实现方式中,  In a third possible implementation,
所述接收模块, 具体用于接收与所述 L-GW对应的第一基站发送的创 建会话请求, 所述创建会话请求包括所述 P-GW的地址标识; 所述处理模块, 具体用于根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述 P-GW之 间的连接; The receiving module is configured to receive a create session request sent by the first base station corresponding to the L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the P-GW; The processing module is specifically configured to establish a connection with the P-GW according to the creation session request;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一基站发送创建会话响应。  The sending module is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first base station.
在第四种可能的实现方式中,  In a fourth possible implementation,
所述接收模块, 具体用于接收与所述第一 L-GW对应的第一移动性管 理实体丽 E发送的创建会话请求, 所述创建会话请求包括所述 P-GW的地 址标识;  The receiving module is configured to receive a create session request sent by the first mobility management entity LIE corresponding to the first L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the P-GW;
所述处理模块, 具体用于根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述 P-GW之 间的连接;  The processing module is specifically configured to establish a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一 MME发送创建会话响应。  The sending module is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first MME.
结合第六个方面至第六个方面的第四种可能的实现方式的任意一种, 在第五种可能的实现方式中, 所述发送模块, 还用于向所述第二 L-GW发 送代理绑定更新或修改承载请求;  With reference to any one of the sixth aspect to the fourth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a fifth possible implementation, the sending module is further configured to send to the second L-GW The proxy binds to update or modify the bearer request;
所述接收模块, 还用于接收所述第二 L-GW发送的代理绑定响应或修 改承载响应。  The receiving module is further configured to receive a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response sent by the second L-GW.
结合第六个方面、 第六个方面的第三种可能的实现方式或是第六个 方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 在第六种可能的实现方式中, 所述发送 模块, 还用于向所述 P-GW发送代理绑定更新或修改承载请求;  With reference to the sixth aspect, the third possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, or the fourth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in the sixth possible implementation manner, the sending module is further used Sending a proxy binding update or modifying a bearer request to the P-GW;
所述接收模块, 还用于接收所述 P-GW发送的代理绑定响应或修改承 载响应。  The receiving module is further configured to receive a proxy binding response or modify a bearer response sent by the P-GW.
第七个方面, 本发明实施例提供一种本地网关, 包括:  In a seventh aspect, the embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway, including:
接收模块, 用于接收代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 所述本地网关 L-GW为用户设备 UE切换到所述第一 L-GW或分组数据网网关 P-GW之前连 接的;  a receiving module, configured to receive a proxy binding update or modify a bearer request, where the local gateway L-GW is connected before the user equipment UE switches to the first L-GW or the packet data network gateway P-GW;
处理模块, 用于根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与所述 第一 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接;  a processing module, configured to establish, according to the proxy binding update or modify a bearer request, a connection with the first L-GW or the P-GW;
发送模块, 用于发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。  A sending module, configured to send a proxy binding response or modify a bearer response.
在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述接收模块, 具体用于接收第一 L-GW 发送的代理绑定更新或修改承载请求;  In a first possible implementation manner, the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding update or modify a bearer request sent by the first L-GW;
所述处理模块, 具体用于根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建 立与所述第一 L-GW之间的连接; The processing module is specifically configured to update or modify a bearer request according to the proxy binding, and build Establishing a connection with the first L-GW;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改 承载响应。  The sending module is specifically configured to send a proxy binding response or modify a bearer response to the first L-GW.
在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述接收模块, 具体用于接收所述 P-GW 发送的代理绑定更新或修改承载请求;  In a second possible implementation, the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding update or modify a bearer request sent by the P-GW;
所述处理模块, 具体用于根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建 立与所述 P-GW之间的连接;  The processing module is specifically configured to establish, according to the proxy binding update or modify a bearer request, a connection with the P-GW;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述 P-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载 响应。  The sending module is specifically configured to send a proxy binding response or modify a bearer response to the P-GW.
结合第七个方面至第七个方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第三种可 能的实现方式中, 所述接收模块, 还用于接收第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定 更新或删除会话请求;  With reference to the first possible implementation of the seventh aspect to the seventh aspect, in a third possible implementation, the receiving module is further configured to receive a proxy binding update sent by the first L-GW or Delete the session request;
所述处理模块, 还用于删除和所述第一 L-GW之间的连接;  The processing module is further configured to delete a connection with the first L-GW;
所述发送模块, 还用于向所述第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会 话响应。  The sending module is further configured to send a proxy binding response or delete a session response to the first L-GW.
结合第七个方面至第七个方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 在第四种可 能的实现方式中, 所述接收模块, 还用于接收所述 P-GW发送的代理绑定 更新或删除会话请求;  With reference to the second possible implementation of the seventh aspect to the seventh aspect, in a fourth possible implementation, the receiving module is further configured to receive a proxy binding update sent by the P-GW or Delete the session request;
所述处理模块, 还用于删除和所述 P-GW之间的连接;  The processing module is further configured to delete a connection with the P-GW;
所述发送模块, 还用于向所述 P-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响 应。  The sending module is further configured to send a proxy binding response or delete a session response to the P-GW.
第八个方面, 本发明实施例提供一种本地网关, 包括:  In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway, including:
接收模块, 用于接收代理绑定更新或删除会话请求;  a receiving module, configured to receive a proxy binding update or delete a session request;
处理模块, 用于删除与第一本地网关 L-GW之间的连接或与分组数据 网网关 P-GW之间的连接, 所述第一 L-GW为用户设备 UE当前连接的, 所 述 L-GW或所述 P-GW为所述 UE连接所述第一 L-GW之前连接的;  a processing module, configured to delete a connection with the first local gateway L-GW or a connection with the packet data network gateway P-GW, where the first L-GW is currently connected by the user equipment UE, the L - GW or the P-GW is connected before the UE is connected to the first L-GW;
发送模块, 用于发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。  A sending module, configured to send a proxy binding response or delete a session response.
在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述接收模块, 具体用于接收第一 L-GW 发送的代理绑定更新或删除会话请求;  In a first possible implementation manner, the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding update or delete a session request sent by the first L-GW;
所述处理模块,具体用于删除与第一 L-GW之间的连接,所述第一 L-GW 为用户设备 UE当前连接的, 所述 L-GW为所述 UE连接所述第一 L-GW之前 连接的; The processing module is specifically configured to delete a connection with the first L-GW, the first L-GW The user equipment UE is currently connected, and the L-GW is connected before the UE is connected to the first L-GW;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除 会话响应, 以使所述第一 L-GW向所述第一 L-GW对应的第一基站或者第一 MME发送删除会话响应。  The sending module is specifically configured to send a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW, so that the first L-GW sends a first base station or a first corresponding to the first L-GW. An MME sends a delete session response.
在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述接收模块, 具体用于接收所述 P-GW 发送的代理绑定更新或删除会话请求;  In a second possible implementation manner, the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the P-GW;
所述处理模块,具体用于删除与所述 P-GW之间的连接,所述第一 L-GW 为用户设备 UE当前连接的, 所述 P-GW为所述 UE连接所述第一 L-GW之前 连接的;  The processing module is specifically configured to delete the connection with the P-GW, where the first L-GW is currently connected by the user equipment UE, and the P-GW is the UE connected to the first L -GW connected before;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述 P-GW发送删除会话响应, 以使所述 P-GW向与所述 P-GW对应的第一服务网关发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响 应。  The sending module is specifically configured to send a delete session response to the P-GW, so that the P-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes a session response to the first serving gateway corresponding to the P-GW.
结合第八个方面至第八个方面的第二种可能的实现方式中的任意一 种中, 在第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述接收模块, 还用于接收所述第一 L-GW发送的修改承载请求;  With reference to any one of the second aspect to the second possible implementation of the eighth aspect, in a third possible implementation, the receiving module is further configured to receive the first L- Modifying the bearer request sent by the GW;
所述发送模块, 还用于向所述第一 L-GW发送修改承载响应。  The sending module is further configured to send a modify bearer response to the first L-GW.
第九个方面, 本发明实施例提供一种本地网关, 包括: 当用户设备 UE 从第二基站切换到第一基站时,  A ninth aspect, the embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway, including: when a user equipment UE is handed over from a second base station to a first base station,
接收模块, 用于接收修改承载请求;  a receiving module, configured to receive a modify bearer request;
处理模块, 用于将存储的所述 UE 当前服务节点信息由所述第二基站 信息改为第一基站信息, 所述第一基站和所述第二基站对应同一所述本地 网关;  a processing module, configured to change the stored current UE service node information from the second base station information to the first base station information, where the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same local gateway;
发送模块, 用于发送修改承载响应。  A sending module, configured to send a modified bearer response.
在第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述接收模块, 具体用于接收第一基站 发送的修改承载请求;  In a first possible implementation manner, the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a modify bearer request sent by the first base station;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一基站发送修改承载响应。  The sending module is specifically configured to send a modified bearer response to the first base station.
在第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述接收模块, 具体用于接收第一 MME 发送的修改承载请求;  In a second possible implementation manner, the receiving module is specifically configured to receive a modify bearer request sent by the first MME;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一 MME发送修改承载响应。 第十个方面, 本发明实施例提供一种移动性管理实体, 包括: 当用户 设备从第二基站切换到第一基站时, The sending module is specifically configured to send a modify bearer response to the first MME. A tenth aspect, the embodiment of the present invention provides a mobility management entity, including: when a user equipment is handed over from a second base station to a first base station,
接收模块, 用于接收对应的所述第一基站发送的路径切换请求, 所述 路径切换请求中携带有分布式移动性管理 DMM标识和第一本地网关 L-GW 地址, 所述路径切换请求以使第一 L-GW将所述第一 L-GW中存储的第二基 站的信息修改为第一基站的信息, 所述第一基站和所述第二基站对应同一 所述第一 L-GW;  a receiving module, configured to receive a path switch request that is sent by the first base station, where the path switch request carries a distributed mobility management DMM identifier and a first local gateway L-GW address, where the path switch request is And causing the first L-GW to modify information of the second base station stored in the first L-GW to information of the first base station, where the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same first L-GW ;
处理模块, 用于根据所述路径切换请求切换所述第一基站的路径为所 述第一基站与所述第一 L-GW连接;  a processing module, configured to switch, according to the path switching request, a path of the first base station to be connected to the first L-GW by the first base station;
发送模块, 用于向所述第一基站发送路径切换响应, 以使所述第一基 站与所述第二基站之间进行资源释放。  And a sending module, configured to send a path switch response to the first base station, to perform resource release between the first base station and the second base station.
第十一个方面,本发明实施例提供一种本地网关 L-GW ,包括:发射机、 接收机、 存储器以及分别与所述发射机、 所述接收机和所述存储器连接的 处理器, 其中, 所述存储器中存储一组程序代码, 且所述处理器用于调用 所述存储器中存储的程序代码, 执行第一个方面至第一个方面的第六种可 能的实现方式中任意一项所述的方法。  In an eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway L-GW, including: a transmitter, a receiver, a memory, and a processor respectively connected to the transmitter, the receiver, and the memory, where Storing a set of program code in the memory, and the processor is configured to invoke the program code stored in the memory, and perform any one of the sixth aspect to the sixth possible implementation manner of the first aspect The method described.
第十二个方面,本发明实施例提供一种本地网关 L-GW ,包括:发射机、 接收机、 存储器以及分别与所述发射机、 所述接收机和所述存储器连接的 处理器, 其中, 所述存储器中存储一组程序代码, 且所述处理器用于调用 所述存储器中存储的程序代码, 执行第二个方面至第二个方面的第五种可 能的实现方式中任意一项所述的方法。  In a twelfth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway L-GW, including: a transmitter, a receiver, a memory, and a processor respectively connected to the transmitter, the receiver, and the memory, where Storing a set of program code in the memory, and the processor is configured to invoke program code stored in the memory, and perform any one of a second aspect to a fifth possible implementation of the second aspect The method described.
第十三个方面,本发明实施例提供一种本地网关 L-GW ,包括:发射机、 接收机、 存储器以及分别与所述发射机、 所述接收机和所述存储器连接的 处理器, 其中, 所述存储器中存储一组程序代码, 且所述处理器用于调用 所述存储器中存储的程序代码, 执行第三个方面至第三个方面的第三种可 能的实现方式中任意一项所述的方法。  In a thirteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway L-GW, including: a transmitter, a receiver, a memory, and a processor respectively connected to the transmitter, the receiver, and the memory, where Storing a set of program code in the memory, and the processor is configured to invoke program code stored in the memory, and perform any one of a third aspect to a third possible implementation of the third aspect The method described.
第十四个方面,本发明实施例提供一种本地网关 L-GW ,包括:发射机、 接收机、 存储器以及分别与所述发射机、 所述接收机和所述存储器连接的 处理器, 其中, 所述存储器中存储一组程序代码, 且所述处理器用于调用 所述存储器中存储的程序代码, 执行第四个方面至第四个方面的第二种可 能的实现方式中任意一项所述的方法。 In a fourteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a local gateway L-GW, including: a transmitter, a receiver, a memory, and a processor respectively connected to the transmitter, the receiver, and the memory, where Storing a set of program codes in the memory, and the processor is configured to invoke the program code stored in the memory, and perform the second aspect to the second aspect of the fourth aspect A method as claimed in any of the preceding embodiments.
第十五个方面, 本发明实施例提供一种移动性管理实体丽 E , 包括: 发射机、 接收机、 存储器以及分别与所述发射机、 所述接收机和所述存储 器连接的处理器, 其中, 所述存储器中存储一组程序代码, 且所述处理器 用于调用所述存储器中存储的程序代码, 执行第五个方面可能的实现方式 中所述的方法。  In a fifteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a mobility management entity, including: a transmitter, a receiver, a memory, and a processor respectively connected to the transmitter, the receiver, and the memory, Wherein the memory stores a set of program codes, and the processor is configured to invoke program code stored in the memory to perform the method described in a possible implementation of the fifth aspect.
由上述技术方案可知, 本发明实施例提供的通信方法、 通信装置及通 信系统, 通过第一本地网关 L-GW接收创建会话请求, 该创建会话请求中 携带有第二 L-GW的地址标识或分组数据网网关 P-GW的地址标识, 接着, 第一 L-GW根据该创建会话请求建立与第二 L-GW或 P-GW之间的连接, 从 而完成第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的连接, 或完成第一 L-GW与 P_GW之间 的连接, 第一 L-GW发送创建会话响应, 进而实现 UE在不同网络之间的切 换。 附图说明 为了更清楚地说明本发明实施例或现有技术中的技术方案, 下面将对实 施例或现有技术描述中所需要使用的附图作一简单地介绍, 显而易见地, 下 面描述中的附图是本发明的一些实施例, 对于本领域普通技术人员来讲, 在 不付出创造性劳动的前提下, 还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。  According to the foregoing technical solution, the communication method, the communication device, and the communication system provided by the embodiment of the present invention receive a create session request by using the first local gateway L-GW, where the create session request carries the address identifier of the second L-GW or An address identifier of the packet data network gateway P-GW, and then the first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the creation session request, thereby completing the first L-GW and the second L - The connection between the GWs, or the connection between the first L-GW and the P_GW, the first L-GW sends a Create Session Response, thereby enabling the UE to switch between different networks. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS In order to more clearly illustrate the embodiments of the present invention or the technical solutions in the prior art, a brief description of the drawings used in the embodiments or the prior art description will be briefly described below. The drawings are some embodiments of the present invention, and those skilled in the art can obtain other drawings based on these drawings without any creative work.
图 1为本发明一实施例通信方法的流程示意图;  1 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图 2为本发明另一实施例通信方法的流程示意图;  2 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present invention;
图 3为本发明再一实施例通信方法的流程示意图;  3 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention;
图 4为本发明再一实施例通信方法的流程示意图;  4 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention;
图 5为本发明再一实施例通信方法的流程示意图;  FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图 6为本发明一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图;  6 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图 7为本发明另一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图;  FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图 8为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图;  8 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention;
图 9为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图;  9 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention;
图 10为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图;  FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图 1 1为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图; 图 12为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信 流程示意图 FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention;
图 13为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信 流程示意图  13 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
图 14为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信 流程示意图  FIG. 14 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention;
图 15为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信 流程示意图  15 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
图 16为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信 流程示意图  16 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
图 17为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信 流程示意图  17 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
图 18为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信 流程示意图  18 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
图 19为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信 流程示意图  19 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
图 20为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信 流程示意图  20 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
图 21为本发明一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图;  21 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图 22为本发明另一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图;  FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to another embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图 23为本发明再一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图;  FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图 24为本发明再一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图;  24 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention;
图 25为本发明一实施例移动性管理实体的结构示意图;  25 is a schematic structural diagram of a mobility management entity according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图 26为本发明再一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图;  26 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention;
图 27为本发明再一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图;  Figure 27 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention;
图 28为本发明再一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图;  28 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention;
图 29为本发明再一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图;  29 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention;
图 30为本发明另一实施例 MME的结构示意图。 具体实施方式 为使本发明实施例的目的、 技术方案和优点更加清楚, 下面将结合本 发明实施例中的附图, 对本发明实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、 完整地描 述, 显然,所描述的实施例是本发明一部分实施例, 而不是全部的实施例。 基于本发明中的实施例, 本领域普通技术人员在没有作出创造性劳动前提 下所获得的所有其他实施例, 都属于本发明保护的范围。  FIG. 30 is a schematic structural diagram of an MME according to another embodiment of the present invention. The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention are clearly and completely described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention. The embodiments are a part of the embodiments of the invention, and not all of the embodiments. All other embodiments obtained by a person of ordinary skill in the art based on the embodiments of the present invention without creative efforts are within the scope of the present invention.
图 1为本发明一实施例通信方法的流程示意图; 如图 1所示, 该通信 方法, 在需要维持 UE的业务连续性的基础上, 具体包括以下歩骤:  FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 1 , the communication method includes the following steps on the basis of maintaining service continuity of the UE:
歩骤 101、 第一本地网关 L-GW接收创建会话请求。  Step 101: The first local gateway L-GW receives a create session request.
其中, 该创建会话请求中携带有第二 L-GW 的地址标识或分组数据网 网关 P-GW的地址标识。 The creation session request carries the address identifier or packet data network of the second L-GW. The address identifier of the gateway P-GW.
在本实施例中, 该第二 L-GW、 该 P-GW为 UE切换到第一 L-GW之前连 接的, 其中, 第二 L-GW或 P-GW可以为 UE分配 IP地址, 同时, UE在使用 第一 L-GW分配新的 IP地址的同时, 还可以使用未进行本次切换前的 IP 地址, UE当前与第一 L-GW连接。  In this embodiment, the second L-GW and the P-GW are connected before the UE is handed over to the first L-GW, where the second L-GW or the P-GW may allocate an IP address to the UE, and While the UE uses the first L-GW to allocate a new IP address, the UE may also use the IP address before the current handover, and the UE is currently connected to the first L-GW.
本实施例适用在以下的适用场景中:  This embodiment is applicable to the following applicable scenarios:
第一适用场景, UE在不同小区的网络之间进行切换, 其中, UE切换 前后的网络均为支持 D丽功能的网络, 简称 D丽 网络, 并且, 在当前 UE 连接的 D丽网络中,第一 L-GW与第一 L-GW对应的第一 MME之间没有接口, 第一 L-GW对应的 MME是为该 UE服务的丽5。  In the first applicable scenario, the UE performs handover between networks of different cells, where the network before and after the UE handover is a network supporting the D-function, which is referred to as a D-network, and in the current network connected to the UE, the first There is no interface between the first MME corresponding to the first L-GW, and the MME corresponding to the first L-GW is the MN 5 serving the UE.
具体的, 在 UE当前与第一 L-GW对应的第一基站之间建立连接之后, 第一 L-GW可以接收与第一 L-GW对应的第一基站发送的创建会话请求, 该 创建会话请求包括第二 L-GW的地址标识, 其中, UE当前与第一 L-GW对应 的第一基站连接, UE与第一 L-GW进行连接之前与第二 L-GW连接, 并且, UE还可以使用未进行本次切换前该第二 L-GW为 UE分配的 IP地址。  Specifically, after establishing a connection between the UE and the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW, the first L-GW may receive a create session request sent by the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW, where the session is created. The request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW, where the UE is currently connected to the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW, and the UE is connected to the second L-GW before connecting with the first L-GW, and the UE further The IP address assigned by the second L-GW to the UE before the current handover may be used.
第二适用场景, UE在不同小区的网络之间进行切换, 其中, 该些网络 均为 D丽网络,并且,在当前 UE连接的 D丽网络中,第一 L-GW与第一 L-GW 对应的 MME之间设置有接口。  In a second applicable scenario, the UE performs handover between networks of different cells, where the networks are all D-networks, and in the current UE-connected D-network, the first L-GW and the first L-GW An interface is provided between the corresponding MMEs.
具体的, 在 UE当前与第一基站之间建立连接之后, 第一 L-GW可以接 收第一 MME发送的创建会话请求, 该创建会话请求包括第二 L-GW的地址 标识, 其中, UE与第一 L-GW进行连接之前与第二 L-GW连接, 并且, UE 还可以使用未进行本次切换前该第二 L-GW为 UE分配的 IP地址。  Specifically, after the UE establishes a connection with the first base station, the first L-GW may receive a create session request sent by the first MME, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW, where the UE and the UE The first L-GW is connected to the second L-GW before the connection is made, and the UE may also use the IP address allocated by the second L-GW to the UE before the current handover.
第三适用场景, UE从 EPS网络切换到 DMM网络, 并且, 在 UE当前连 接的 DMM网络中, 第一 L-GW与第一 L-GW对应的 MME之间没有接口。  In a third applicable scenario, the UE switches from the EPS network to the DMM network, and in the DMM network that the UE is currently connected to, the first L-GW has no interface with the MME corresponding to the first L-GW.
具体的, 在 UE当前与第一 L-GW对应的第一基站之间建立连接之后, 第一 L-GW可以接收与第一 L-GW对应的第一基站发送的创建会话请求, 该 创建会话请求包括 P-GW的地址标识, 其中, UE与第一 L-GW进行连接之前 与该 P-GW连接, 并且, UE还可以使用未进行本次切换该第二 L-GW为 UE 分配的 IP地址。  Specifically, after establishing a connection between the UE and the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW, the first L-GW may receive a create session request sent by the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW, where the session is created. The request includes an address identifier of the P-GW, where the UE is connected to the P-GW before the connection with the first L-GW, and the UE may also use the IP that is not allocated by the second L-GW for the UE. address.
第四适用场景, UE从 EPS网络切换到 DMM网络, 并且在 UE当前连接 的 DMM网络中, 第一 L-GW与第一 L-GW对应的 MME之间设置有接口。 The fourth applicable scenario, the UE switches from the EPS network to the DMM network, and the UE is currently connected. In the DMM network, an interface is provided between the first L-GW and the MME corresponding to the first L-GW.
具体的, 在 UE当前与第一 L-GW对应的第一基站之间建立连接之后, 第一 L-GW可以接收与第一 L-GW对应的第一 MME发送的创建会话请求, 该 创建会话请求包括 P-GW的地址标识, 其中, UE与第一 L-GW进行连接之前 与该 P-GW连接, 并且, UE还可以使用未进行本次切换该第二 L-GW为 UE 分配的 IP地址。 。  Specifically, after establishing a connection between the UE and the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW, the first L-GW may receive a create session request sent by the first MME corresponding to the first L-GW, where the session is created. The request includes an address identifier of the P-GW, where the UE is connected to the P-GW before the connection with the first L-GW, and the UE may also use the IP that is not allocated by the second L-GW for the UE. address. .
歩骤 102、第一 L-GW根据该创建会话请求建立与第二 L-GW或所述 P-GW 之间的连接。  Step 102: The first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request.
在本实施例中, 相应于歩骤 101中的适用场景, 本歩骤 102可以具体 为:  In this embodiment, corresponding to the applicable scenario in step 101, the step 102 may be specifically as follows:
在第一适用场景下或是在第二适用场景下, 第一 L-GW根据创建会话 请求建立与第二 L-GW之间的连接,从而,第二 L-GW相当于现有技术的 EPS 网络中 P-GW的功能, 第一 L-GW相当于现有技术的 EPS网络中 S-GW的功 能。  In the first applicable scenario or in the second applicable scenario, the first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW according to the create session request, and thus, the second L-GW is equivalent to the EPS of the prior art. The function of the P-GW in the network, the first L-GW is equivalent to the function of the S-GW in the EPS network of the prior art.
具体的, 在第一适用场景下或是在第二适用场景下, 歩骤 102、 第一 Specifically, in the first applicable scenario or in the second applicable scenario, step 102, first
L-GW根据创建会话请求建立与第二 L-GW或 P-GW之间的连接,具体可以包 括: The L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request, and specifically includes:
第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或修改承载请求;  Sending, by the first L-GW, a proxy binding update or modifying a bearer request to the second L-GW;
第一 L-GW接收第二 L-GW发送的代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。  The first L-GW receives the proxy binding response sent by the second L-GW or modifies the bearer response.
在第三适用场景下或是在第四适用场景下, 第一 L-GW根据创建会话 请求建立与 P-GW之间的连接, 从而, 第一 L-GW相当于现有技术的 EPS网 络中 S-GW的功能。  In the third applicable scenario or in the fourth applicable scenario, the first L-GW establishes a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request, so that the first L-GW is equivalent to the EPS network in the prior art. The function of the S-GW.
具体的, 在第三适用场景下或是在第四适用场景下, 歩骤 102、 第一 L-GW根据创建会话请求建立与第二 L-GW或 P-GW之间的连接,具体可以包 括:  Specifically, in the third applicable scenario or in the fourth applicable scenario, the step 102, the first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request, and may specifically include :
第一 L-GW向 P-GW发送代理绑定更新或修改承载请求;  The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or a modification bearer request to the P-GW;
第一 L-GW接收 P-GW发送的代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。  The first L-GW receives the proxy binding response sent by the P-GW or modifies the bearer response.
歩骤 103、 第一 L-GW发送创建会话响应。  Step 103: The first L-GW sends a create session response.
在本实施例中, 相应于歩骤 101中的适用场景, 本歩骤 103可以具体 为: 在第一适用场景下或是在第三适用场景下, 第一 L-GW 向第一基站发 送创建会话响应。 In this embodiment, corresponding to the applicable scenario in step 101, the step 103 may be specifically as follows: In the first applicable scenario or in the third applicable scenario, the first L-GW sends a create session response to the first base station.
在第二适用场景下或是在第四适用场景下, 第一 L-GW向第一 MME发 送创建会话响应。  In the second applicable scenario or in the fourth applicable scenario, the first L-GW sends a create session response to the first MME.
本实施例提供的通信方法, 通过第一本地网关 L-GW接收创建会话请 求, 该创建会话请求中携带有第二 L-GW 的地址标识或分组数据网网关 P-GW的地址标识, 接着, 第一 L-GW根据该创建会话请求建立与第二 L-GW 或 P-GW之间的连接, 从而完成第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的连接, 或完 成第一 L-GW与 P-GW之间的连接, 第一 L-GW发送创建会话响应, 进而实 现 U E在不同网络之间的切换。  The communication method provided by the embodiment receives the create session request by the first local gateway L-GW, where the create session request carries the address identifier of the second L-GW or the address identifier of the packet data network gateway P-GW, and then, The first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request, thereby completing the connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, or completing the first L- The connection between the GW and the P-GW, the first L-GW sends a session creation response, thereby implementing handover of the UE between different networks.
图 2为本发明另一实施例通信方法的流程示意图; 如图 2所示, 该通 信方法, 具体包括以下歩骤:  2 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 2, the communication method specifically includes the following steps:
歩骤 201、 第二 L-GW接收代理绑定更新或修改承载请求。  Step 201: The second L-GW receives the proxy binding update or modifies the bearer request.
在本实施例中,第二 L-GW为 UE切换到第一 L-GW或 P-GW之前连接的, 其中, 第一 L-GW或 P-GW可以为 UE分配新的 IP地址, 同时, UE不仅可以 使用新的 IP地址, 还可以使用未进行本次切换前的 IP地址。  In this embodiment, the second L-GW is connected before the UE is handed over to the first L-GW or the P-GW, where the first L-GW or the P-GW may allocate a new IP address to the UE, and The UE can not only use the new IP address, but also use the IP address before the current handover.
需要说明的是, 本实施例的一种实现方法可以适用于图 1所示实施例 中的第一适用场景或第二适用场景, 还可以应用在新的适用场景中, 例如 第五适用场景或第六适用场景。  It should be noted that an implementation method of this embodiment may be applicable to the first applicable scenario or the second applicable scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 , and may also be applied to a new applicable scenario, such as a fifth applicable scenario or The sixth applicable scenario.
第五适用场景, 若 UE从 DMM网络切换到 EPS网络, 并且, 在 UE在切 换前连接的 D丽网络中, 第二 L-GW与第二 L-GW对应的 MME之间没有设置 接口。  In the fifth applicable scenario, if the UE switches from the DMM network to the EPS network, and the MN that is connected before the UE is switched, the interface between the second L-GW and the MME corresponding to the second L-GW is not set.
第六适用场景, 若 UE从 DMM网络切换到 EPS网络, 并且, 在 UE在切 换前连接的 D丽网络中, 第二 L-GW与第二 L-GW对应的 MME之间设置有接 口。  In the sixth application scenario, if the UE switches from the DMM network to the EPS network, and the MME connected to the UE before the switching, the second L-GW and the MME corresponding to the second L-GW are provided with an interface.
具体的,不论是在上述哪种适用场景下,第二 L-GW可以接收第一 L-GW 或 P-GW发送的代理绑定更新或修改承载请求。  Specifically, the second L-GW may receive the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request sent by the first L-GW or the P-GW, in any of the foregoing applicable scenarios.
歩骤 202、第二 L-GW根据代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与第一 L-GW或 P-GW之间的连接。  Step 202: The second L-GW establishes a connection with the first L-GW or the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request.
具体的, 本实施例的一种实现方法适用于图 1所示实施例中的第一适 用场景或第二适用场景下, 第二 L-GW根据代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与第一 L-GW 之间的连接; 在第五适用场景或第六适用场景下第二 L-GW根据代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与 P-GW之间的连接。 Specifically, an implementation method of this embodiment is applicable to the first mode in the embodiment shown in FIG. In the scenario or the second applicable scenario, the second L-GW establishes a connection with the first L-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request; and the second L in the fifth applicable scenario or the sixth applicable scenario. The GW establishes a connection with the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or modification of the bearer request.
歩骤 203、 第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。  Step 203: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or modifies a bearer response.
具体的, 本实施例的一种实现方法适用于图 1所示实施例中的第一适 用场景或第二适用场景下, 第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修 改承载响应; 在第五适用场景或第六适用场景下第二 L-GW向 P-GW发送代 理绑定响应或修改承载响应。  Specifically, an implementation method of this embodiment is applicable to the first applicable scenario or the second applicable scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1, where the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or modification to the first L-GW. Carrying a response; in the fifth applicable scenario or the sixth applicable scenario, the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the P-GW.
本实施例提供的通信方法是通过第二本地网关 L-GW接收代理绑定更 新或修改承载请求, 其中, 第二 L-GW为 UE切换到第一 L-GW或 P-GW之前 连接的, 在 UE切换到第一 L-GW或 P-GW之后, 仍然可以使用该第二 L-GW 为 UE分配的 IP地址; 第二 L-GW根据代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建 立与第一 L-GW或 P-GW之间的连接; 第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改 承载响应, 从而完成第二 L-GW与第一 L-GW或 P-GW之间的连接, 进而实 现 U E在不同网络之间的切换。  The communication method provided in this embodiment is to receive a proxy binding update or modify a bearer request by using the second local gateway L-GW, where the second L-GW is connected before the UE switches to the first L-GW or the P-GW, After the UE switches to the first L-GW or the P-GW, the second L-GW can still use the IP address allocated by the second L-GW for the UE; the second L-GW updates or modifies the bearer request according to the proxy binding, and establishes with the first a connection between the L-GW or the P-GW; the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or modifies the bearer response, thereby completing the connection between the second L-GW and the first L-GW or the P-GW, and further Realize the handover of the UE between different networks.
在上述实施例的基础上, 在第一适用场景或是第二适用场景下, 在歩 骤 203、 第二 L-GW或第二 P-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应之后, 还可以包括:  On the basis of the foregoing embodiment, in the first applicable scenario or the second applicable scenario, after the step 203, the second L-GW, or the second P-GW sends the proxy binding response or the modified bearer response, Includes:
歩骤 204、 第二 L-GW接收第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除会话 请求。  Step 204: The second L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the first L-GW.
在本实施例中, UE从一个 DMM网络小区切换到另一个 DMM网络小区时, 不论 UE当前连接的 D丽网络中, MME与第一 L-GW之间是否存在接口, 在 新的 DMM网络小区进行 PDN连接的重建之后, UE不需要第二 L_GW或第二 P-GW分配的 IP地址, 从而可以进行 PDN连接去连接, 从而第二本地网关 L-GW可以接收第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除会话请求。  In this embodiment, when the UE switches from one DMM network cell to another DMM network cell, whether there is an interface between the MME and the first L-GW in the new DMM network, regardless of whether the UE is currently connected to the D-network, After performing the reconstruction of the PDN connection, the UE does not need the IP address assigned by the second L_GW or the second P-GW, so that the PDN connection can be disconnected, so that the second local gateway L-GW can receive the proxy sent by the first L-GW. Bind updates or delete session requests.
歩骤 205、 第二 L-GW删除和第一 L-GW之间的承载。  Step 205: The second L-GW deletes the bearer between the first L-GW and the first L-GW.
歩骤 206、第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。 在上述实施例的基础上, 在第五适应场景和第六适应场景下, 在歩骤 203、 第二 L-GW或第二 P-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应之后, 还 可以包括: 第二本地网关 L-GW接收 P-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除会话请求; 第二 L-GW删除和 P-GW之间的连接; Step 206: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW. On the basis of the foregoing embodiment, in the fifth adaptation scenario and the sixth adaptation scenario, after the step 203, the second L-GW, or the second P-GW sends the proxy binding response or the modified bearer response, the method may further include : The second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the P-GW; the second L-GW deletes the connection with the P-GW;
第二 L-GW向 P-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。  The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the P-GW.
具体的, UE从 D丽网络切换到 EPS网络时, 不论 UE之前连接的 D丽 网络中, MME与第一 L-GW之间是否存在接口, 在 EPS网络进行 PDN连接的 重建之后, UE不需要第二 L-GW分配的 IP地址进行 PDN连接去连接, 从而 第二本地网关 L-GW可以接收 P-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除会话请求, 进而执行上述方法。  Specifically, when the UE switches from the D-network to the EPS network, whether the interface exists between the MME and the first L-GW in the D-network connected to the UE, after the EPS network performs the PDN connection reconstruction, the UE does not need to The IP address allocated by the second L-GW is connected to the PDN connection, so that the second local gateway L-GW can receive the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the P-GW, and then perform the above method.
图 3为本发明再一实施例通信方法的流程示意图; 如图 3所示, 该通 信方法, 具体包括以下歩骤:  FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 3, the communication method specifically includes the following steps:
歩骤 301、 第二 L-GW接收删除会话请求。  Step 301: The second L-GW receives the delete session request.
在本实施例的一种实现方式中, UE从一个 DMM网络小区切换到另一个 DMM网络小区时, 不论 UE当前连接的 DMM网络中, MME与第一 L-GW之间 是否存在接口, 在新的 DMM网络小区进行 PDN连接的重建之后, UE可以不 需要第二 L-GW或第二 P-GW分配的 IP地址, 从而可以进行 PDN连接去连 接, 即第二本地网关 L-GW可以接收删除会话请求。  In an implementation manner of this embodiment, when the UE switches from one DMM network cell to another DMM network cell, whether there is an interface between the MME and the first L-GW in the DMM network currently connected by the UE, in the new After the DMM network cell performs the reconstruction of the PDN connection, the UE may not need the IP address assigned by the second L-GW or the second P-GW, so that the PDN connection can be disconnected, that is, the second local gateway L-GW can receive the deletion. Session request.
在本实施例的另一种实现方式中, UE从一个 DMM网络小区切换到一个 EPS网络小区时, 在新的 EPS网络小区进行 PDN连接的重建之后, UE可以 不需要第二 L-GW分配的 IP地址, 从而可以进行 PDN连接去连接, 即第二 L-GW接收 P-GW发送的删除会话请求, 以使删除第二 L-GW与 P_GW之间的 连接。  In another implementation manner of this embodiment, when the UE switches from one DMM network cell to one EPS network cell, after the new EPS network cell performs the PDN connection reconstruction, the UE may not need to allocate the second L-GW. The IP address, so that the PDN connection can be disconnected, that is, the second L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the P-GW, so that the connection between the second L-GW and the P_GW is deleted.
歩骤 302、第二 L-GW删除与第一 L-GW之间的连接或与 P_GW之间的连 接。  Step 302: The second L-GW deletes the connection with the first L-GW or the connection with the P_GW.
在本实施例的一种实现方式中, 第二本地网关 L-GW可以接收删除会 话请求, 以使第二 L-GW删除第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的连接, 其中, 第一 L-GW为 UE当前连接的 L-GW , 第二 L-GW为 UE连接第一 L_GW之前连 接的。  In an implementation manner of this embodiment, the second local gateway L-GW may receive the delete session request, so that the second L-GW deletes the connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, where The first L-GW is the L-GW to which the UE is currently connected, and the second L-GW is connected before the UE connects to the first L_GW.
在本实施例的另一种实现方式中, 第二 L-GW接收 P-GW发送的删除会 话请求, 以使删除第二 L-GW与 P-GW之间的连接, P-GW为用户设备 UE当 前连接的, 第二 L-GW为 UE连接 P-GW之前连接的。 歩骤 303、 第二 L-GW发送删除会话响应。 In another implementation manner of this embodiment, the second L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the P-GW, so that the connection between the second L-GW and the P-GW is deleted, and the P-GW is the user equipment. The second L-GW that is currently connected by the UE is connected before the UE connects to the P-GW. Step 303: The second L-GW sends a delete session response.
具体的, 在本实施例的一种实现方式中, UE从一个 DMM网络小区切换 到另一个 DMM网络小区时, 不论 UE当前连接的 DMM网络中, MME与第一 L-GW之间是否存在接口, 在第二本地网关 L-GW接收删除会话请求之后, 第二 L-GW可以向第一 L-GW发送删除会话响应,以使第一 L-GW向第一 L_GW 对应的第一基站或者第一 MME发送删除会话响应。  Specifically, in an implementation manner of this embodiment, when the UE switches from one DMM network cell to another DMM network cell, whether there is an interface between the MME and the first L-GW in the DMM network currently connected by the UE After the second local gateway L-GW receives the delete session request, the second L-GW may send a delete session response to the first L-GW, so that the first L-GW sends the first base station or the first corresponding to the first L-GW. An MME sends a delete session response.
在本实施例的另一种实现方式中, UE从一个 DMM网络小区切换到一个 EPS网络小区时, 在第二 L-GW接收 P-GW发送的删除会话请求之后, 第二 L-GW向 P-GW发送删除会话响应, 以使 P-GW向与 P-GW对应的第一 S-GW 发送删除会话响应。  In another implementation manner of this embodiment, when the UE switches from one DMM network cell to one EPS network cell, after the second L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the P-GW, the second L-GW sends a P to the P The GW sends a delete session response, so that the P-GW sends a delete session response to the first S-GW corresponding to the P-GW.
在本实施例中, 第二本地网关 L-GW接收删除会话请求, 以使删除第 一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的连接或第二 L-GW与 P_GW之间的连接, 接着, 第二 L-GW发送删除会话响应, 从而删除第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的连 接, 或建立第一 L-GW与 P-GW之间的连接, 进而实现 UE可以切换到其他 网络小区中。  In this embodiment, the second local gateway L-GW receives the delete session request, so as to delete the connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW or the connection between the second L-GW and the P_GW, and then The second L-GW sends a delete session response, thereby deleting the connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, or establishing a connection between the first L-GW and the P-GW, so that the UE can switch. Go to other network cells.
进一歩的, 在歩骤 301、 第二本地网关 L-GW接收第一 L-GW发送的删 除会话请求之前, 还可以包括:  Further, before receiving the deletion session request sent by the first L-GW, the second local gateway L-GW may further include:
第二 L-GW接收第一 L-GW发送的修改承载请求;  The second L-GW receives the modified bearer request sent by the first L-GW;
第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送修改承载响应。  The second L-GW sends a modified bearer response to the first L-GW.
图 4为本发明再一实施例通信方法的流程示意图; 如图 4所示, 该通 信方法, 具体包括以下歩骤:  FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 4, the communication method specifically includes the following steps:
歩骤 401、 第一 L-GW接收修改承载请求。  Step 401: The first L-GW receives the modify bearer request.
在本实施例中, UE可以在不同基站, 即第一基站与第二基站之间进行 切换,本实施例的一种适用场景是, UE在进行切换之前有数据业务发生时, 进行数据业务的切换, 其中, 在丽 E没有发生重定位的场景下, 并且第一 基站和第二基站对应同一 L-GW ,第一基站可以向对应的第一 MME发送路径 切换请求。  In this embodiment, the UE may perform handover between different base stations, that is, the first base station and the second base station. In a applicable scenario of the present embodiment, when the data service occurs before the UE performs the handover, the data service is performed. In the scenario where the relocation does not occur, and the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same L-GW, the first base station may send a path switch request to the corresponding first MME.
在本实施例的一种实现方式中, MME与第一 L-GW之间没有存在接口, 第一 L-GW可以接收第一基站发送的修改承载请求。  In an implementation manner of this embodiment, an interface exists between the MME and the first L-GW, and the first L-GW may receive the modify bearer request sent by the first base station.
在本实施例的另一种实现方式中, MME与第一 L-GW之间存在接口, 第 一 L-GW可以接收第一 MME发送的修改承载请求。 In another implementation manner of this embodiment, an interface exists between the MME and the first L-GW, where An L-GW may receive a modify bearer request sent by the first MME.
歩骤 402、 第一 L-GW将存储的 UE当前服务节点信息由第二基站信息 改为第一基站信息。  Step 402: The first L-GW changes the stored current serving node information of the UE from the second base station information to the first base station information.
在本实施例中, 不论 MME与第一 L-GW之间是否存在接口, 第一 L-GW 可以将原存储的第二基站的信息修改为第一基站的信息, 其中, 第一基站 和第二基站对应同一第一 L-GW,其中该第一基站的信息中包括有数据传输 的地址和隧道端点标识 ( Tunnel Endpoint Identifi er , TEID ) 。  In this embodiment, whether the interface exists between the MME and the first L-GW, the first L-GW may modify the information of the originally stored second base station to the information of the first base station, where the first base station and the first base station The second base station corresponds to the same first L-GW, wherein the information of the first base station includes an address of the data transmission and a tunnel end point identifier (TEID).
歩骤 403、 第一 L-GW发送修改承载响应。  Step 403: The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response.
在本实施例的一种实现方式中, MME与第一 L-GW之间没有存在接口, 第一 L-GW向第一基站发送修改承载响应。  In an implementation manner of this embodiment, the interface between the MME and the first L-GW does not exist, and the first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first base station.
在本实施例的另一种实现方式中, MME与第一 L-GW之间存在接口, 第 一 L-GW可以向第一 MME发送修改承载响应。  In another implementation manner of this embodiment, an interface exists between the MME and the first L-GW, and the first L-GW may send a modify bearer response to the first MME.
在本实施例中, 第一 L-GW接收修改承载请求, 接着, 第一 L-GW将存 储的 UE 当前服务节点信息由第二基站信息改为第一基站信息, 并且第一 L-GW发送修改承载响应, 从而实现 UE可以切换到其他网络小区中。  In this embodiment, the first L-GW receives the modify bearer request, and then the first L-GW changes the stored current serving node information of the UE from the second base station information to the first base station information, and the first L-GW sends the information. The bearer response is modified so that the UE can switch to other network cells.
图 5为本发明再一实施例通信方法的流程示意图; 如图 5所示, 该通 信方法, 具体包括以下歩骤:  FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 5, the communication method specifically includes the following steps:
歩骤 501、 第一 MME接收对应的第一基站发送的路径切换请求。  Step 501: The first MME receives a path switch request sent by the corresponding first base station.
该路径切换请求中携带有 D丽标识和第一 L-GW地址, 路径切换请求 以使第一 L-GW将第一 L-GW中存储的第二基站的信息修改为第一基站的信 息, 第一基站和第二基站对应同一第一 L-GW。  The path switching request carries the Dili identifier and the first L-GW address, and the path switching request is used to enable the first L-GW to modify the information of the second base station stored in the first L-GW to the information of the first base station. The first base station and the second base station correspond to the same first L-GW.
具体的, UE可以在不同基站, 即第一基站与第二基站之间进行切换, 本实施例的一种适用场景是, UE在进行切换之前有数据业务发生时, 进行 数据业务的切换, 其中, 在丽 E没有发生重定位的场景下, 并且第一基站 和第二基站对应同一 L-GW,第一 MME接收对应的第一基站发送的路径切换 请求。  Specifically, the UE may perform handover between different base stations, that is, the first base station and the second base station. In a applicable scenario, the UE performs data service switching when a data service occurs before the handover occurs. In the scenario where no relocation occurs, the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same L-GW, and the first MME receives the path switch request sent by the corresponding first base station.
在本实施例中, 第一 MME接收对应的第一基站发送的路径切换请求, 该路径切换请求中携带有第一基站的信息, 其中该信息中包括有数据传输 的地址和 TEID。  In this embodiment, the first MME receives the path switch request sent by the corresponding first base station, where the path switch request carries the information of the first base station, where the information includes the address and TEID of the data transmission.
歩骤 502、 第一 MME根据路径切换请求切换第一基站的路径为第一基 站与第一 L-GW连接。 Step 502: The first MME switches the path of the first base station to the first base according to the path switching request. The station is connected to the first L-GW.
歩骤 503、 第一丽 E向第一基站发送路径切换响应。  Step 503: The first switch sends a path switch response to the first base station.
本实施例提供的通信方法, 通过第一 MME接收对应的第一基站发送的 路径切换请求, 路径切换请求中携带有 D丽标识, 第一基站和第二基站对 应同一第一 L-GW, 接着, 第一 MME根据路径切换请求切换第一基站的路径 为第一基站与第一 L-GW连接, 并且, 第一丽 E向第一基站发送路径切换 响应, 以使第一基站通知第二基站进行资源释放。 从而, 第一 MME根据路 径切换请求切换第一基站的路径为第一基站与第一 L-GW连接, 进而 UE在 保持数据连接连续性的情况下, 可以从第一基站切换到第二基站。  In the communication method provided by the embodiment, the first MME receives the path switching request sent by the corresponding first base station, where the path switching request carries the Dili identifier, and the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same first L-GW, and then The first MME switches the path of the first base station according to the path switching request to the first base station to connect with the first L-GW, and the first MME sends a path switching response to the first base station, so that the first base station notifies the second base station. Release resources. Therefore, the first MME switches the path of the first base station according to the path switching request to the first base station to connect with the first L-GW, and the UE can switch from the first base station to the second base station while maintaining the continuity of the data connection.
图 6为本发明一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图; 如图 6所示, UE 在不同小区的网络之间进行切换, 其中, UE切换前后的该些网络均为 D丽 网络,并且,当前 UE连接的第一 DMM网络中的 L-GW与 MME之间没有接口。 具体的, 在 UE从第二 DMM网络小区切换到第三 DMM网络小区, 再切换到 当前与 UE建立连接的第一 DMM网络小区的情景下, 第二 DMM网络中的第 二 L-GW在与 UE相连时, 为 UE分配了一个 IP地址, 在当 UE切换到当前 连接的第一 DMM网络小区时, UE可以继续使用第二 L-GW分配的 IP地址。  FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a signaling process of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 6, the UE performs handover between networks of different cells, where the networks before and after the UE handover are all Dy networks, and There is no interface between the L-GW and the MME in the first DMM network to which the current UE is connected. Specifically, in a scenario where the UE switches from the second DMM network cell to the third DMM network cell, and then switches to the first DMM network cell that is currently connected with the UE, the second L-GW in the second DMM network is When the UE is connected, the UE is assigned an IP address. When the UE switches to the currently connected first DMM network cell, the UE may continue to use the IP address allocated by the second L-GW.
该通信方法具体可以包括以下歩骤:  The communication method may specifically include the following steps:
歩骤 601、 第一基站与第三基站之间进行决策触发切换。  Step 601: Perform a decision trigger switch between the first base station and the third base station.
本实施例中的第一基站为 UE 当前连接的基站, 即该第一基站在第一 D丽网络中, 第三基站为 UE在切换到第一基站之前最近一次连接的基站, 即第三基站在第三 DMM网络中。第一基站与第三基站根据无线链路的测量 结果, 触发切换。  The first base station in this embodiment is the base station to which the UE is currently connected, that is, the first base station is in the first D-network, and the third base station is the base station that the UE last connected before switching to the first base station, that is, the third base station. In the third DMM network. The first base station and the third base station trigger the handover according to the measurement result of the wireless link.
歩骤 602、 第三基站向与第三基站对应的第三 MME发送切换请求, 其 中, 与第三基站对应的第三 MME是指该第三 MME可以为与第三基站上连接 的 UE进行服务, 第一基站对应的第一 MME是指该第一 MME可以为与第一 基站上连接的 UE进行服务。  Step 602: The third base station sends a handover request to the third MME corresponding to the third base station, where the third MME corresponding to the third base station is that the third MME may serve the UE connected to the third base station. The first MME corresponding to the first base station is that the first MME may serve the UE connected to the first base station.
歩骤 603、 第三丽 E向第一 MME发送转发重定位请求。  Step 603: The third MME sends a forwarding relocation request to the first MME.
在本实施例中, 该转发重定位请求中携带有 UE上下文信息。  In this embodiment, the forwarding relocation request carries UE context information.
歩骤 604、 第一丽 E向第一基站发送切换请求。  Step 604: The first MME sends a handover request to the first base station.
具体的, 第一 MME将每条 PDN连接的 EPS承载上下文告知第一基站。 歩骤 605、 第一基站向与第一基站对应的第一 L-GW发送创建会话请 求。 Specifically, the first MME informs the first base station of the EPS bearer context of each PDN connection. Step 605: The first base station sends a create session request to the first L-GW corresponding to the first base station.
该创建会话请求包括第二 L-GW的地址标识, 其中, 该第二 L-GW在第 二 DMM网络中, 并且该第二 L-GW为 UE分配的 IP地址在 UE切换过程中一 直可以被 UE使用。  The create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW, where the second L-GW is in the second DMM network, and the IP address allocated by the second L-GW to the UE can always be Used by the UE.
歩骤 606、 第一 L-GW向 PCRF (Pol icy and Charging Rules Function, 策略与计费规则功能) 发起 IP-CAN ( IP-Connectivity Access Network, IP连接访问网络) 会话建立或修改流程。  Step 606: The first L-GW initiates an IP-CAN (IP-Connectivity Access Network) session establishment or modification process to the PCRF (Polic icy and Charging Rules Function).
本实施例中, 如果部署了动态 PCC (Pol icy and Charging Control , 策略与计费控制) , 则第一 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话建立或修改流 程, 并获得 UE的 PCC策略信息。  In this embodiment, if dynamic PCC (Polic and Charging Control) is deployed, the first L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF, and obtains PCC policy information of the UE.
歩骤 607、第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或修改承载请求。 在本实施例中, 该代理绑定更新或修改承载请求用以建立第一 L-GW 与第二 L-GW之间的连接。  Step 607: The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or a modify bearer request to the second L-GW. In this embodiment, the proxy binding update or modify bearer request is used to establish a connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
歩骤 608、第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。 歩骤 609、 第一 L-GW向第一基站发送创建会话响应。  Step 608: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the first L-GW. Step 609: The first L-GW sends a create session response to the first base station.
歩骤 610、 第一基站向第一 MME发送切换请求响应。  Step 610: The first base station sends a handover request response to the first MME.
该切换请求响应携带有 D丽标识。  The handover request response carries a Dili identity.
歩骤 611、 第一 MME向第三 MME发送转发重定位响应。  Step 611: The first MME sends a forwarding relocation response to the third MME.
歩骤 612、 第三丽 E向第三基站发送切换命令。  Step 612: The third router sends a handover command to the third base station.
歩骤 613、 第三基站向 UE发送切换命令。  Step 613: The third base station sends a handover command to the UE.
歩骤 614、 UE向第一基站发送切换确认。  Step 614: The UE sends a handover confirmation to the first base station.
歩骤 615、 第一基站向第一 MME发送切换通知。  Step 615: The first base station sends a handover notification to the first MME.
歩骤 616、 UE执行跟踪区域更新过程。  Step 616: The UE performs a tracking area update process.
需要说明的是, 如果第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间采用 PMIP协议, 则 歩骤 607、 第一 L-GW 向第二 L-GW 发送代理绑定更新 (Proxy Binding Update , 简称 PBU) , 相应的, 歩骤 608、 第二 L_GW向第一 L_GW发送代 理绑定应答 (Proxy Binding Acknowledgement , 简称 PBA) 消息, 以建立 第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的隧道信息。  It should be noted that, if the PMIP protocol is adopted between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, then the first L-GW sends a proxy binding update (Proxy Binding Update) to the second L-GW. PBU), correspondingly, step 608, the second L_GW sends a Proxy Binding Acknowledgement (PBA) message to the first L_GW to establish tunnel information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW. .
在建立第一 L-GW 与第二 L-GW之间的隧道信息之后, 需要释放第三 L-GW的资源, 具体的, 释放第三 L-GW资源的方法可以为: After establishing the tunnel information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, the third device needs to be released. The L-GW resource, specifically, the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
在图 6所示实施例中的歩骤 607与歩骤 608之间还可以执行歩骤: 第 三 L-GW 收到第二 L-GW 发送的绑定撤销指示 (Binding Revocat ion Indi cat ion , 简称 BRI ) 消息, 则删除关于此 PDN连接的 EPS承载上下文 信息。 或者第三 L-GW资源的释放可以通过歩骤 612和歩骤 613之间执行 歩骤: 第三 L-GW收到第三基站发送的删除会话请求, 则删除关于此 PDN 连接的 EPS承载上下文信息。 需要说明的是, 若 UE直接从第二网络切换 到第一网络, 则不需要第三 L-GW资源释放的过程。  The step 607 and the step 608 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 may further perform the step: the third L-GW receives the binding revocation indication sent by the second L-GW (Binding Revocation Indication) Referring to the BRI message, the EPS bearer context information about this PDN connection is deleted. Or the release of the third L-GW resource may be performed by the step 612 and the step 613: the third L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the third base station, and deletes the EPS bearer context about the PDN connection. information. It should be noted that if the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
如果第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间采用 GTP协议,则歩骤 607、第一 L_GW 向第二 L-GW发送修改承载请求,相应的,歩骤 608、第二 L-GW向第一 L_GW 发送修改承载响应消息, 以建立第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的承载信息。  If the GTP protocol is adopted between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, then the first L_GW sends a modify bearer request to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, step 608, the second L-GW The first L_GW sends a modify bearer response message to establish bearer information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
在建立第一 L-GW 与第二 L-GW之间的承载信息之后, 需要释放第三 L-GW的资源, 具体的, 释放第三 L-GW资源的方法可以为:  After the bearer information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW is established, the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released. Specifically, the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
在图 6所示实施例中的歩骤 612与歩骤 613之间还可以执行歩骤: 第 三 L-GW收到第三基站发送的删除会话请求, 删除关于此 PDN连接的 EPS 承载上下文信息。  The step 612 and the step 613 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 may further perform the step: the third L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the third base station, and deletes the EPS bearer context information about the PDN connection. .
需要说明的是, 若 UE直接从第二网络切换到第一网络, 则不需要第 三 L-GW资源释放的过程。  It should be noted that if the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
需要说明的是, 在本实施例一实现方式中, 若 UE从第二 DMM网络切 换到第三 EPS网络, 再切换到第一 DMM网络, 并且, 在 UE当前连接的第 一 DMM网络中, 第一 L-GW与第一 MME之间没有接口的场景下, UE切换的 方法的基本原理与图 6所示实施例的基本原理基本相同, 区别在于, 第三 L-GW相应于 P-GW, 并且第三网络中需要增加 S-GW资源释放的过程, 即在 第三 P-GW收到第二 L-GW发送的绑定撤销指示消息之后可以执行歩骤: 第 三 P-GW向第三 S-GW发送删除承载请求, 第三 S-GW向第三 P_GW发送删除 承载响应; 或者, 第三丽 E向第三基站发送切换命令之后, 第三丽 E向第 三 S-GW发送删除会话请求, 和第三 S-GW向第三 MME发送删除会话响应。 若 UE直接从第二网络切换到第一网络, 则不需要第三 L-GW资源释放的过 程。 并且若 UE直接从第二 EPS网络切换到第一 DMM网络, 则第二 L-GW相 当于 P-GW,并且第二网络中需要增加 S-GW资源释放的过程,即在第二 P-GW 收到第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定更新或修改承载请求之后, 向第二 S-GW发 送删除承载请求, 第二 S-GW向第二 P-GW发送删除承载响应; 或者, 第二 MME向第二基站发送切换命令之后,第二丽 E向第二 S-GW发送删除会话请 求, 和第二 S-GW向第二丽 E发送删除会话响应。 It should be noted that, in an implementation manner of this embodiment, if the UE switches from the second DMM network to the third EPS network, and then switches to the first DMM network, and in the first DMM network that the UE is currently connected, In a scenario where there is no interface between the L-GW and the first MME, the basic principle of the UE handover method is basically the same as the basic principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, except that the third L-GW corresponds to the P-GW. And the third network needs to increase the S-GW resource release process, that is, after the third P-GW receives the binding revocation indication message sent by the second L-GW, the third P-GW may perform the following steps: The S-GW sends a delete bearer request, and the third S-GW sends a delete bearer response to the third P_GW; or, after the third E sends a handover command to the third base station, the third E sends a delete session to the third S-GW. The request, and the third S-GW send a delete session response to the third MME. If the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required. And if the UE directly switches from the second EPS network to the first DMM network, the second L-GW is equivalent to the P-GW, and the process of releasing the S-GW resource release is needed in the second network, that is, in the second P-GW. After receiving the proxy binding update or modifying the bearer request sent by the first L-GW, sending a delete bearer request to the second S-GW, where the second S-GW sends a delete bearer response to the second P-GW; or, the second After the MME sends the handover command to the second base station, the second MME sends a delete session request to the second S-GW, and the second S-GW sends a delete session response to the second MME.
图 7为本发明另一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图, 如图 7所示, FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG.
UE在不同小区的网络之间进行切换, 其中, UE切换前后的该些网络均为 DMM网络, 并且, 当前 UE连接的第一 D丽网络中的本地网关 L-GW与 MME 之间设置有接口。 具体的, 在 UE从第二 DMM网络小区切换到第三 DMM网 络小区, 再切换到当前与 UE建立连接的第一 DMM网络小区的情景下, 第 二 DMM网络中的第二 L-GW在与 UE相连时, 为 UE分配了一个 IP地址, 在 当 UE切换到当前连接的第一 DMM网络小区时, UE可以继续使用第二 L-GW 分配的 IP地址。 The UE performs handover between networks of different cells, where the networks before and after the UE handover are all DMM networks, and an interface is set between the local gateway L-GW and the MME in the first D-network connected by the current UE. . Specifically, in a scenario where the UE switches from the second DMM network cell to the third DMM network cell, and then switches to the first DMM network cell that is currently connected with the UE, the second L-GW in the second DMM network is When the UE is connected, the UE is assigned an IP address. When the UE switches to the currently connected first DMM network cell, the UE may continue to use the IP address assigned by the second L-GW.
该通信方法具体可以包括以下歩骤:  The communication method may specifically include the following steps:
歩骤 701、 第一基站与第三基站之间进行决策触发切换。  Step 701: Perform a decision trigger switch between the first base station and the third base station.
本实施例中的第一基站为 UE 当前连接的基站, 即该第一基站在第一 The first base station in this embodiment is a base station to which the UE is currently connected, that is, the first base station is in the first
D丽网络中, 第三基站为 UE在切换到第一基站之前最近一次连接的基站, 即第三基站在第三 DMM网络中。第一基站与第三基站根据无线链路的测量 结果, 触发切换。 In the D-network, the third base station is the base station that the UE last connected before switching to the first base station, that is, the third base station is in the third DMM network. The first base station and the third base station trigger the handover according to the measurement result of the wireless link.
歩骤 702、 第三基站向与第三基站对应的第三 MME发送切换请求。 在本实施例中, 与第三基站对应的第三 MME是指该第三 MME可以为与 第三基站上连接的 UE进行服务, 与第一基站对应的第一 MME是指该第一 MME可以为与第一基站上连接的 UE进行服务。  Step 702: The third base station sends a handover request to a third MME corresponding to the third base station. In this embodiment, the third MME corresponding to the third eNB may be that the third MME may serve the UE connected to the third eNB, and the first MME corresponding to the first eNB may be the first MME. Serving the UE connected to the first base station.
歩骤 703、 第三丽 E向第一 MME发送转发重定位请求, 该转发重定位 请求中携带有 UE上下文信息。  Step 703: The third MME sends a forwarding relocation request to the first MME, where the forwarding relocation request carries UE context information.
歩骤 704、 第一丽 E向第一基站发送切换请求。  Step 704: The first E sends a handover request to the first base station.
具体的, 第一 MME将每条 PDN连接的 EPS承载上下文告知第一基站。 歩骤 705、第一基站向与第一基站对应的第一 MME发送切换请求通知, 该切换请求通知中携带有 D丽标识和第一 L-GW地址标识, 其中, 该第一 L-GW在第一 DMM网络中。 该 DMM标识和第一 L_GW地址标识表明该第一基 站支持 D丽服务并且希望第一 MME创建第一基站与第一 L-GW之间的连接。 歩骤 706、第一丽 E向第一 L-GW发送创建会话请求, 该创建会话请求 中携带有第二 L-GW地址标识。 Specifically, the first MME informs the first base station of the EPS bearer context of each PDN connection. Step 705: The first base station sends a handover request notification to the first MME corresponding to the first base station, where the handover request notification carries a Dili identifier and a first L-GW address identifier, where the first L-GW is In the first DMM network. The DMM identity and the first L_GW address identifier indicate that the first base station supports the Dali service and that the first MME is required to establish a connection between the first base station and the first L-GW. Step 706: The first E-E sends a create session request to the first L-GW, where the create session request carries the second L-GW address identifier.
歩骤 707、 第一 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话建立或修改流程。  Step 707: The first L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF.
本实施例中, 如果部署了动态 PCC , 则 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话 建立或修改流程, 并获得 UE的 PCC策略信息。  In this embodiment, if dynamic PCC is deployed, the L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF, and obtains PCC policy information of the UE.
歩骤 708、第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或修改承载请求。 歩骤 709、第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。 歩骤 710、 第一 L-GW向第一 MME发送创建会话响应。  Step 708: The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or a modify bearer request to the second L-GW. Step 709: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the first L-GW. Step 710: The first L-GW sends a create session response to the first MME.
歩骤 71 1、 第一 MME向第三 MME发送转发重定位响应。  Step 71: The first MME sends a forwarding relocation response to the third MME.
歩骤 712、 第一丽 E向第一基站发送切换请求完成消息, 该切换请求 完成消息中包括与第一基站对应的第一 L-GW 的上行数据传输的地址和 Step 712: The first MME sends a handover request completion message to the first base station, where the handover request completion message includes an address of the uplink data transmission of the first L-GW corresponding to the first base station.
TEID o TEID o
歩骤 713、 第三丽 E向第三基站发送切换命令。  Step 713: The third router sends a handover command to the third base station.
歩骤 714、 第三基站向 UE发送切换命令。  Step 714: The third base station sends a handover command to the UE.
歩骤 715、 UE向第一基站发送切换确认。  Step 715: The UE sends a handover confirmation to the first base station.
歩骤 716、 第一基站向第一 MME发送切换通知。  Step 716: The first base station sends a handover notification to the first MME.
歩骤 717、 第一丽 E向第一 L-GW发送修改承载请求。  Step 717: The first E sends a modify bearer request to the first L-GW.
歩骤 718、 第一 L-GW向第一 MME发送修改承载响应。  Step 718: The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first MME.
歩骤 719、 UE执行跟踪区域更新过程。  Step 719: The UE performs a tracking area update process.
需要说明的是, 如果第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间采用 PMIP协议, 则 歩骤 708、 第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新, 相应的, 歩骤 709、 第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定应答消息, 以建立第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的隧道信息。  It should be noted that, if the PMIP protocol is adopted between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, the step 708, the first L-GW sends a proxy binding update to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, the step 709. The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response message to the first L-GW to establish tunnel information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
在建立第一 L-GW 与第二 L-GW之间的隧道信息之后, 需要释放第三 L-GW的资源, 具体的, 释放第三 L-GW资源的方法可以为:  After the tunnel information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW is established, the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released. Specifically, the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
在图 7所示实施例中的歩骤 708与歩骤 709之间还可以执行歩骤: 第 三 L-GW收到第二 L-GW发送的 BRI消息, 则删除关于此 PDN连接的 EPS承 载上下文信息。 或者第三 L-GW资源的释放可以在歩骤 71 1和歩骤 712之 间执行歩骤: 第三 L-GW收到第三丽 E发送的删除会话请求, 则删除关于 此 PDN连接的 EPS承载上下文信息。 需要说明的是, 若 UE直接从第二网 络切换到第一网络, 则不需要第三 L-GW资源释放的过程。 The step 708 and the step 709 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 may further perform the step: the third L-GW receives the BRI message sent by the second L-GW, and deletes the EPS bearer related to the PDN connection. Contextual information. Or the release of the third L-GW resource may be performed between step 71 1 and step 712: the third L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the third MN, and deletes the EPS about the PDN connection. Host context information. It should be noted that if the UE directly from the second network The network switches to the first network, and the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
如果第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间采用 GTP协议,则歩骤 708、第一 L_GW 向第二 L-GW发送修改承载请求,相应的,歩骤 709、第二 L-GW向第一 L_GW 发送修改承载响应消息, 以建立第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的承载信息。  If the GTP protocol is adopted between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, the step 708, the first L_GW sends a modify bearer request to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, step 709, the second L-GW The first L_GW sends a modify bearer response message to establish bearer information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
在建立第一 L-GW 与第二 L-GW之间的承载信息之后, 需要释放第三 After establishing the bearer information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, the third device needs to be released.
L-GW的资源, 具体的, 释放第三 L-GW资源的方法可以为: The L-GW resource, specifically, the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
在图 7所示实施例中的歩骤 71 1与歩骤 712之间还可以执行歩骤: , 第三 L-GW收到第三 MME发送的删除会话请求, 则删除关于此 PDN连接的 EPS承载上下文信息。  A step may be further performed between the step 71 1 and the step 712 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 : the third L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the third MME, and deletes the EPS about the PDN connection. Host context information.
需要说明的是, 若 UE直接从第二网络切换到第一网络, 则不需要第 三 L-GW资源释放的过程。  It should be noted that if the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
需要说明的是本实施例一实现方式中, 若 UE从第二 DMM网络切换到 第三 EPS网络, 再切换到第一 DMM网络, 并且, 在 UE当前连接的第一 DMM 网络中, 第一 L-GW与第一 MME之间设置有接口的场景下, UE切换的方法 的基本原理与图 7所示实施例的基本原理基本相同, 区别在于, 第三 L-GW 相应于 P-GW, 并且第三网络中需要增加 S-GW资源释放的过程, 即在第三 P-GW 收到第二 L-GW 发送的绑定撤销指示消息之后可以执行歩骤: 第三 P-GW向第三 S-GW发送删除承载请求, 第三 S-GW向第三 P-GW发送删除承 载响应; 或者, 第一丽 E向第三丽 E发送转发重定位响应之后, 第三 MME 向第三 S-GW发送删除会话请求, 和第三 S-GW向第三 MME发送删除会话响 应。 若 UE直接从第二网络切换到第一网络, 则不需要第三 L-GW资源释放 的过程。并且若 UE直接从第二 EPS网络切换到第一 D丽网络,则第二 L-GW 相当于 P-GW, 并且第二网络中需要增加 S-GW资源释放的过程, 即在第二 P-GW 收到第一 L-GW 发送的代理绑定更新或修改承载请求之后, 向第二 S-GW发送删除承载请求,第二 S-GW向第二 P-GW发送删除承载响应;或者, 第一丽 E向第二 MME发送转发重定位响应之后, 第二丽 E向第二 S-GW发 送删除会话请求, 和第二 S-GW向第二 MME发送删除会话响应。  It should be noted that, in the implementation manner of the first embodiment, if the UE switches from the second DMM network to the third EPS network, and then switches to the first DMM network, and in the first DMM network that the UE is currently connected, the first L In the scenario where an interface is set between the GW and the first MME, the basic principle of the method for UE handover is basically the same as the basic principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 , except that the third L-GW corresponds to the P-GW, and The process of the S-GW resource release is required to be performed in the third network, that is, after the third P-GW receives the binding revocation indication message sent by the second L-GW, the following steps may be performed: the third P-GW goes to the third S. - The GW sends a delete bearer request, and the third S-GW sends a delete bearer response to the third P-GW; or, after the first MME sends the forward relocation response to the third MME, the third MME sends the third MME to the third S-GW. Sending a delete session request, and the third S-GW sends a delete session response to the third MME. If the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required. And if the UE directly switches from the second EPS network to the first D-network, the second L-GW is equivalent to the P-GW, and the process of releasing the S-GW resource needs to be added in the second network, that is, in the second P- After receiving the proxy binding update or modifying the bearer request sent by the first L-GW, the GW sends a delete bearer request to the second S-GW, and the second S-GW sends a delete bearer response to the second P-GW; or, After transmitting the forwarding relocation response to the second MME, the second E sends a deletion session request to the second S-GW, and the second S-GW sends a deletion session response to the second MME.
图 8为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图; 如图 8所示, UE在不同小区的网络之间进行切换, 其中, UE切换前后的该些网络均为 DMM网络, 并且, 当前 UE连接的第一 D丽网络中的本地网关 L-GW与 MME 之间设置有接口。 具体的, 在 UE从第二 DMM网络小区切换到第三 DMM网 络小区, 再切换到当前与 UE建立连接的第一 DMM网络小区的情景下, 第 二 DMM网络中的第二 L-GW在与 UE相连时, 为 UE分配了一个 IP地址, 在 当 UE切换到当前连接的第一 DMM网络小区时, UE可以继续使用第二 L-GW 分配的 IP地址。 FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 8, the UE performs handover between networks of different cells, where the networks before and after UE handover are DMM networks, and Local gateway L-GW and MME in the first D-network connected by the current UE There is an interface between them. Specifically, in a scenario where the UE switches from the second DMM network cell to the third DMM network cell, and then switches to the first DMM network cell that is currently connected with the UE, the second L-GW in the second DMM network is When the UE is connected, the UE is assigned an IP address. When the UE switches to the currently connected first DMM network cell, the UE may continue to use the IP address assigned by the second L-GW.
具体的, UE 切换到当前连接的第一 DMM 网络小区之后, 该第一 MME 知道第一基站支持 D丽网络的情况下,该通信方法具体可以包括以下歩骤: 歩骤 801、 第一基站与第三基站之间进行决策触发切换。  Specifically, after the UE switches to the currently connected first DMM network cell, and the first MME knows that the first base station supports the Dili network, the communication method may specifically include the following steps: Step 801: The first base station and the first base station Decision-making trigger switching is performed between the third base stations.
本实施例中的第一基站为 UE 当前连接的基站, 即该第一基站在第一 D丽网络中, 第三基站为 UE在切换到第一基站之前最近一次连接的基站, 即第三基站在第三 DMM网络中。第一基站与第三基站根据无线链路的测量 结果, 触发切换。  The first base station in this embodiment is the base station to which the UE is currently connected, that is, the first base station is in the first D-network, and the third base station is the base station that the UE last connected before switching to the first base station, that is, the third base station. In the third DMM network. The first base station and the third base station trigger the handover according to the measurement result of the wireless link.
歩骤 802、 第三基站向与第三基站对应的第三 MME发送切换请求。 在本实施例中, 与第三基站对应的第三 MME是指该第三 MME可以为与 第三基站上连接的 UE进行服务,第一基站对应的第一 MME是指该第一 MME 可以为与第一基站上连接的 UE进行服务。  Step 802: The third base station sends a handover request to a third MME corresponding to the third base station. In this embodiment, the third MME corresponding to the third eNB may be that the third MME may serve the UE connected to the third eNB, and the first MME corresponding to the first eNB may be that the first MME may be Serving with the UE connected to the first base station.
歩骤 803、 第三丽 E向第一 MME发送转发重定位请求。  Step 803: The third MME sends a forwarding relocation request to the first MME.
该转发重定位请求中携带有 UE上下文信息。  The forwarding relocation request carries UE context information.
歩骤 804、 第一丽 E向第一 L-GW发送创建会话请求。  Step 804: The first E sends a create session request to the first L-GW.
该创建会话请求中携带有第二 L-GW地址。  The create session request carries a second L-GW address.
歩骤 805、 第一 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话建立或修改流程。  Step 805: The first L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF.
本实施例中, 如果部署了动态 PCC , 则 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话 建立流程, 并获得 UE的 PCC策略信息。  In this embodiment, if dynamic PCC is deployed, the L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment procedure to the PCRF, and obtains PCC policy information of the UE.
歩骤 806、第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或修改承载请求。 歩骤 807、第二 L-GW向第一 L_GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。 歩骤 808、 第一 L-GW向第一 MME发送创建会话响应。  Step 806: The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or a modify bearer request to the second L-GW. Step 807: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the first L_GW. Step 808: The first L-GW sends a create session response to the first MME.
歩骤 809、 第一丽 E向第一基站发送切换请求。  Step 809: The first router sends a handover request to the first base station.
歩骤 810、 第一基站向第一 MME发送切换请求响应。  Step 810: The first base station sends a handover request response to the first MME.
歩骤 81 1、 第一 MME向第三 MME发送转发重定位响应。  Step 81: The first MME sends a forwarding relocation response to the third MME.
歩骤 812、 第三丽 E向第三基站发送切换命令。 歩骤 813、 第三基站向 UE发送切换命令。 Step 812: The third E sends a handover command to the third base station. Step 813: The third base station sends a handover command to the UE.
歩骤 814、 UE向第一基站发送切换确认。  Step 814: The UE sends a handover confirmation to the first base station.
歩骤 815、 第一基站向第一 MME发送切换通知。  Step 815: The first base station sends a handover notification to the first MME.
歩骤 816、 第一丽 E向第一 L-GW发送修改承载请求。  Step 816: The first E sends a modify bearer request to the first L-GW.
歩骤 817、 第一 L-GW向第一 MME发送修改承载响应。  Step 817: The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first MME.
歩骤 818、 UE执行跟踪区域更新过程。  Step 818: The UE performs a tracking area update process.
需要说明的是, 如果第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间采用 PMIP协议, 则 歩骤 806、 第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新, 相应的, 歩骤 807、 第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定应答消息, 以建立第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的隧道信息。  It should be noted that, if the PMIP protocol is adopted between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, then the first L-GW sends a proxy binding update to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, the step 807. The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response message to the first L-GW to establish tunnel information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
在建立第一 L-GW 与第二 L-GW之间的隧道信息之后, 需要释放第三 L-GW的资源, 具体的, 释放第三 L-GW资源的方法可以为:  After the tunnel information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW is established, the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released. Specifically, the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
在图 8所示实施例中的歩骤 806与歩骤 807之间还可以执行歩骤: 第 三 L-GW收到第二 L-GW发送的 BRI消息, 则删除关于此 PDN连接的 EPS承 载上下文信息。 或者第三 L-GW资源的释放可以通过歩骤 81 1和歩骤 812 之间执行歩骤: 第三 L-GW收到第三 MME发送的删除会话请求, 则删除关 于此 PDN连接的 EPS承载上下文信息。 需要说明的是, 若 UE直接从第二 网络切换到第一网络, 则不需要第三 L-GW资源释放的过程。  The step 806 and the step 807 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 may further perform the step: the third L-GW receives the BRI message sent by the second L-GW, and deletes the EPS bearer related to the PDN connection. Contextual information. Or the release of the third L-GW resource may be performed by the step 81 1 and the step 812: the third L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the third MME, and deletes the EPS bearer related to the PDN connection. Contextual information. It should be noted that if the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
如果第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间采用 GTP协议,则歩骤 806、第一 L-GW 向第二 L-GW发送修改承载请求,相应的,歩骤 807、第二 L-GW向第一 L_GW 发送修改承载响应消息, 以建立第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的承载信息。  If the GTP protocol is adopted between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, then the first L-GW sends a modify bearer request to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, step 807, the second L- The GW sends a modify bearer response message to the first L_GW to establish bearer information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
在建立第一 L-GW 与第二 L-GW之间的承载信息之后, 需要释放第三 L-GW的资源, 具体的, 释放第三 L-GW资源的方法可以为:  After the bearer information between the first L-GW and the second L-GW is established, the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released. Specifically, the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
在图 8所示实施例中的歩骤 81 1与歩骤 812之间还可以执行歩骤: , 第三 L-GW收到第三 MME发送的删除会话请求, 则删除关于此 PDN连接的 EPS承载上下文信息。  A step may be further performed between the step 81 1 and the step 812 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 : the third L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the third MME, and deletes the EPS about the PDN connection. Host context information.
需要说明的是, 若 UE直接从第二网络切换到第一网络, 则不需要第 三 L-GW资源释放的过程。  It should be noted that if the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
需要说明的是本实施例一实现方式中, 若 UE从第二 DMM网络切换到 第三 EPS网络, 再切换到第一 DMM网络, 并且, 在 UE当前连接的第一 D丽 网络中, 第一 L-GW与第一 MME之间设置有接口的场景下, UE切换的方法 的基本原理与图 8所示实施例的基本原理基本相同, 区别在于, 第三 L-GW 相应于 P-GW, 并且第三网络中需要增加 S-GW资源释放的过程, 即在第三 P-GW 收到第二 L-GW 发送的绑定撤销指示消息之后可以执行歩骤: 第三 P-GW向第三 S-GW发送删除承载请求, 第三 S-GW向第三 P-GW发送删除承 载响应; 或者, 第一丽 E向第三丽 E发送转发重定位响应之后, 第三 MME 向第三 S-GW发送删除会话请求, 和第三 S-GW向第三 MME发送删除会话响 应。 若 UE直接从第二网络切换到第一网络, 则不需要第三 L-GW资源释放 的过程。并且若 UE直接从第二 EPS网络切换到第一 D丽网络,则第二 L-GW 相当于 P-GW, 并且第二网络中需要增加 S-GW资源释放的过程, 即在第二 P-GW 收到第一 L-GW 发送的代理绑定更新或修改承载请求之后, 向第二 S-GW发送删除承载请求,第二 S-GW向第二 P-GW发送删除承载响应;或者, 第一丽 E向第二 MME发送转发重定位响应之后, 第二丽 E向第二 S-GW发 送删除会话请求, 和第二 S-GW向第二 MME发送删除会话响应。 It should be noted that, in an implementation manner of this embodiment, if the UE switches from the second DMM network to the third EPS network, and then switches to the first DMM network, and the first D In the scenario where the interface is configured between the first L-GW and the first MME, the basic principle of the UE handover method is basically the same as the basic principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. 8. The difference is that the third L-GW corresponds. In the P-GW, and the third network needs to increase the S-GW resource release process, that is, after the third P-GW receives the binding revocation indication message sent by the second L-GW, the following steps may be performed: - The GW sends a delete bearer request to the third S-GW, and the third S-GW sends a delete bearer response to the third P-GW; or, after the first MME sends the forward relocation response to the third MME, the third MME Sending a delete session request to the third S-GW, and transmitting a delete session response to the third MME by the third S-GW. If the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required. And if the UE directly switches from the second EPS network to the first D-network, the second L-GW is equivalent to the P-GW, and the process of releasing the S-GW resource needs to be added in the second network, that is, in the second P- After receiving the proxy binding update or modifying the bearer request sent by the first L-GW, the GW sends a delete bearer request to the second S-GW, and the second S-GW sends a delete bearer response to the second P-GW; or, After transmitting the forwarding relocation response to the second MME, the second E sends a deletion session request to the second S-GW, and the second S-GW sends a deletion session response to the second MME.
在本实施例一实现方法中, 若 UE从第二 DMM网络切换到第三 EPS网 络, 再切换到第一 EPS网络, 则 UE在后续的 EPS网络中切换的流程可以 根据 EPS流程即可, 因此, 在此说明 UE从第二 DMM网络切换到第三 EPS 网络的一次重建过程。 具体可分为两种使用场景, 第一种适用场景, 第二 D丽网络中的第二 MME不知道第二基站是否支持 D丽网络, 则流程与图 7 所示实施例基本相同, 区别在于, 第一 L-GW相应于 P-GW。 第二种适用场 景, 第二 DMM网络中的第二 MME知道第二基站支持 DMM网络, 则流程与图 8所示实施例基本相同, 区别在于, 第一 L-GW相应于 P-GW。  In the implementation method of the first embodiment, if the UE switches from the second DMM network to the third EPS network and then switches to the first EPS network, the process of the UE switching in the subsequent EPS network may be performed according to the EPS process. Here, a reconstruction process in which the UE switches from the second DMM network to the third EPS network is described. Specifically, it can be divided into two usage scenarios. The first applicable scenario is that the second MME in the second D-network does not know whether the second base station supports the D-network, and the process is basically the same as the embodiment shown in FIG. 7. The difference is that The first L-GW corresponds to the P-GW. In the second applicable scenario, the second MME in the second DMM network knows that the second base station supports the DMM network, and the process is basically the same as the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, except that the first L-GW corresponds to the P-GW.
图 9为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图; 如图 9所示, UE在不同小区的网络之间进行切换, 其中, UE切换前后的该些网络均为 DMM网络, 并且, 当前 UE连接的第一 D丽网络中的本地网关 L-GW与 MME 之间没有接口。 具体的, 在 UE处于 ECM-IDLE态时, UE从第二 DMM网络小 区切换到第三 DMM网络小区, 再切换到当前与 UE建立连接的第一 DMM网 络小区的情景下, 第二 DMM网络中的第二 L-GW在与 UE相连时, 为 UE分 配了一个 IP地址, 在当 UE切换到当前连接的第一 DMM 网络小区时, UE 可以继续使用第二 L-GW分配的 IP地址。 该通信方法具体可以包括以下歩骤: FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a signaling process of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 9, the UE performs handover between networks of different cells, where the networks before and after UE handover are DMM networks, and There is no interface between the local gateway L-GW and the MME in the first D-network of the current UE connection. Specifically, when the UE is in the ECM-IDLE state, the UE switches from the second DMM network cell to the third DMM network cell, and then switches to the first DMM network cell that is currently connected with the UE, in the second DMM network. When the second L-GW is connected to the UE, the UE is assigned an IP address. When the UE switches to the currently connected first DMM network cell, the UE may continue to use the IP address allocated by the second L-GW. The communication method may specifically include the following steps:
歩骤 901、 UE进行跟踪区域更新触发。  Step 901: The UE performs a tracking area update trigger.
歩骤 902、 UE向第一基站发送跟踪区域更新请求。  Step 902: The UE sends a tracking area update request to the first base station.
歩骤 903、 第一基站向第一 MME发送跟踪区域更新请求, 该跟踪区域 更新请求中携带有 D丽标识。  Step 903: The first base station sends a tracking area update request to the first MME, where the tracking area update request carries the Dili identifier.
歩骤 904、第一丽 E向第三 MME发送上下文请求, 用以请求 UE的上下 文信息。  Step 904: The first MME sends a context request to the third MME to request the context information of the UE.
歩骤 905、 第三丽 E向第一 MME发送上下文响应, 该上下文响应中携 带有第三 MME中的 UE的上下文信息。  Step 905: The third MME sends a context response to the first MME, where the context response carries context information of the UE in the third MME.
歩骤 906、 第一丽 E向第一基站发送承载建立请求, 该承载建立请求 携带有 EPS承载上下文列表, 即包含需要建立的 PDN连接的 EPS承载上下 文信息。  Step 906: The first MME sends a bearer setup request to the first base station, where the bearer setup request carries the EPS bearer context list, that is, the EPS bearer context information including the PDN connection to be established.
歩骤 907、 第一基站向第一 L-GW发送创建会话请求。  Step 907: The first base station sends a create session request to the first L-GW.
该创建会话请求包括第二 L-GW的地址标识, 其中, 该第二 L-GW在第 二 DMM网络中, 并且该第二 L-GW为 UE分配的 IP地址在 UE切换过程中一 直可以被 UE使用。  The create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW, where the second L-GW is in the second DMM network, and the IP address allocated by the second L-GW to the UE can always be Used by the UE.
歩骤 908、 第一 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话建立或修改流程。  Step 908: The first L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF.
本实施例中, 如果部署了动态 PCC , 则 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话 建立或修改流程, 并获得 UE的 PCC策略信息。  In this embodiment, if dynamic PCC is deployed, the L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF, and obtains PCC policy information of the UE.
歩骤 909、第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 以建立第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的连接。  Step 909: The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or a modify bearer request to the second L-GW to establish a connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
歩骤 910、第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。 歩骤 91 1、 第一 L-GW向第一基站发送创建会话响应。  Step 910: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the first L-GW. Step 91: The first L-GW sends a create session response to the first base station.
歩骤 912、 第一基站向第一 MME发送承载建立响应。  Step 912: The first base station sends a bearer setup response to the first MME.
歩骤 913、 第一 MME向第三 MME发送上下文响应。  Step 913: The first MME sends a context response to the third MME.
歩骤 914、 第一丽 E向 HSS发送更新位置。  Step 914: The first E sends an update location to the HSS.
歩骤 915、 HSS向第三 MME发送删除位置, 以删除第三丽 E中 UE的上 下文。  Step 915: The HSS sends a delete location to the third MME to delete the context of the UE in the third MME.
歩骤 916、 第三丽 E向 HSS发送删除位置响应。  Step 916: The third ray sends a delete location response to the HSS.
歩骤 917、 HSS向第一 MME发送更新位置响应。 歩骤 918、 第一丽 E向 UE发送跟踪区域更新接受。 Step 917: The HSS sends an update location response to the first MME. Step 918: The first E sends a tracking area update acceptance to the UE.
需要说明的是, 如果第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间采用 PMIP协议, 则 歩骤 909、 第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新, 相应的, 歩骤 910、 第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定应答消息, 以建立第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的连接。  It should be noted that, if the PMIP protocol is adopted between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, the step 909, the first L-GW sends a proxy binding update to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, the step 910. The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response message to the first L-GW to establish a connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
在建立第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的连接之后, 需要释放第三 L-GW 的资源, 具体的, 释放第三 L-GW资源的方法可以为:  After the connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW is established, the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released. Specifically, the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
在图 9所示实施例中的歩骤 909与歩骤 910之间还可以执行歩骤: 第 三 L-GW收到第二 L-GW发送的绑定撤销指示消息, 则删除关于此 PDN连接 的 EPS承载上下文信息。 或者第三 L-GW资源的释放可以通过歩骤 913和 歩骤 914之间执行歩骤:第三丽 E向第三基站发送去激活承载请求,其中, 该去激活承载请求中携带有操作标识 (Operat i on Indicat ion ) , 以告知 第三基站只需要删除重建的 PDN连接在第三 L-GW上的 EPS承载资源, 接 着, 第三基站向第三 L-GW发送删除会话请求, 则删除关于此 PDN连接的 EPS承载上下文信息。需要说明的是, 若 UE直接从第二网络切换到第一网 络, 则不需要第三 L-GW资源释放的过程。  The step 909 and the step 910 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 may further perform the step: the third L-GW receives the binding revocation indication message sent by the second L-GW, and deletes the PDN connection. The EPS carries context information. Or the release of the third L-GW resource may be performed by the step 913 and the step 914: the third E sends a deactivation bearer request to the third base station, where the deactivation bearer request carries the operation identifier (Operat i on Indicating), to inform the third base station that only the EPS bearer resource of the reconstructed PDN connected to the third L-GW needs to be deleted, and then the third base station sends a delete session request to the third L-GW, and then deletes EPS bearer context information about this PDN connection. It should be noted that if the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
如果第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间采用 GTP协议,则歩骤 909、第一 L-GW 向第二 L-GW发送修改承载请求,相应的,歩骤 910、第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW 发送修改承载响应消息, 以建立第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的连接。  If the GTP protocol is adopted between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, then the first L-GW sends a modify bearer request to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, step 910, the second L- The GW sends a modify bearer response message to the first L-GW to establish a connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
在建立第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的连接之后, 需要释放第三 L-GW 的资源, 具体的, 释放第三 L-GW资源的方法可以为:  After the connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW is established, the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released. Specifically, the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
在图 9所示实施例中的歩骤 912与歩骤 913之间还可以执行歩骤: 第 三丽 E向第三基站发送去激活承载请求, 其中, 该去激活承载请求中携带 有操作标识, 以告知第三基站需要删除重建的 PDN连接在第三 L-GW上的 EPS承载资源, 接着, 第三基站向第三 L-GW发送删除会话请求, 则删除关 于此 PDN连接的 EPS承载上下文信息。  The step 912 and the step 913 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 may further perform the step of: the third E sends a deactivation bearer request to the third base station, where the deactivation bearer request carries the operation identifier In order to inform the third base station that the EPS bearer resource of the reconstructed PDN connection on the third L-GW needs to be deleted, and then the third base station sends a delete session request to the third L-GW, and then delete the EPS bearer context about the PDN connection. information.
需要说明的是, 若 UE直接从第二网络切换到第一网络, 则不需要第 三 L-GW资源释放的过程。  It should be noted that if the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
需要说明的是, 在本实施例一实现方式中, 若 UE从第二 DMM网络切 换到第三 EPS网络, 再切换到第一 DMM网络, 并且, 在 UE当前连接的第 一 DMM网络中, 第一 L-GW与第一 MME之间没有接口的场景下, UE切换的 方法的基本原理与图 9所示实施例的基本原理基本相同, 区别在于, 第三 L-GW相应于 P-GW, 并且第三网络中需要增加 S-GW资源释放的过程, 即在 第三 P-GW收到第二 L-GW发送的绑定撤销指示消息之后可以执行歩骤: 第 三 P-GW向第三 S-GW发送删除承载请求, 接着, 第三 S-GW向第三 P-GW发 送删除承载响应; 或者, 第一丽 E向第三丽 E发送上下文响应之后, 第三 MME向第三 S-GW发送删除会话请求, 和第三 S-GW向第三 MME发送删除会 话响应。 若 UE直接从第二网络切换到第一网络, 则不需要第三 L-GW资源 释放的过程。 并且若 UE直接从第二 EPS网络切换到第一 DMM网络, 则第 二 L-GW相当于 P-GW, 并且第二网络中需要增加 S-GW资源释放的过程, 即 在第二 P-GW收到第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定更新或修改承载请求之后, 向 第二 S-GW发送删除承载请求, 第二 S-GW向第二 P-GW发送删除承载响应; 或者, 第一 MME向第二 MME发送上下文响应之后, 第二 MME向第二 S_GW 发送删除会话请求, 和第二 S-GW向第二 MME发送删除会话响应。 It should be noted that, in an implementation manner of this embodiment, if the UE switches from the second DMM network to the third EPS network, and then switches to the first DMM network, and the UE is currently connected. In a DMM network, in a scenario where there is no interface between the first L-GW and the first MME, the basic principle of the UE handover method is basically the same as the basic principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, and the difference is that the third L-GW Corresponding to the P-GW, and the process of adding the S-GW resource release is required in the third network, that is, after the third P-GW receives the binding revocation indication message sent by the second L-GW, the following steps may be performed: The P-GW sends a delete bearer request to the third S-GW, and then the third S-GW sends a delete bearer response to the third P-GW; or, after the first MME sends the context response to the third MME, the third The MME sends a delete session request to the third S-GW, and the third S-GW sends a delete session response to the third MME. If the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required. And if the UE directly switches from the second EPS network to the first DMM network, the second L-GW is equivalent to the P-GW, and the process of releasing the S-GW resource needs to be added in the second network, that is, in the second P-GW. After receiving the proxy binding update or modifying the bearer request sent by the first L-GW, sending a delete bearer request to the second S-GW, and sending, by the second S-GW, the delete bearer response to the second P-GW; or, the first After the MME sends the context response to the second MME, the second MME sends a delete session request to the second S_GW, and the second S-GW sends a delete session response to the second MME.
图 10为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图;如图 10所示, FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 10,
UE在不同小区的网络之间进行切换, 其中, UE切换前后的该些网络均为 DMM网络, 并且, 当前 UE连接的第一 D丽网络中的本地网关 L-GW与 MME 之间设置有接口。 具体的, 在 UE处于 ECM-IDLE态时, UE从第二 DMM网络 小区切换到第三 DMM网络小区, 再切换到当前与 UE建立连接的第一 D丽 网络小区的情景下, 第二 DMM网络中的第二 L-GW在与 UE相连时, 为 UE 分配了一个 IP地址, 在当 UE切换到当前连接的第一 DMM网络小区时, UE 可以继续使用第二 L-GW分配的 IP地址。 The UE performs handover between networks of different cells, where the networks before and after the UE handover are all DMM networks, and an interface is set between the local gateway L-GW and the MME in the first D-network connected by the current UE. . Specifically, when the UE is in the ECM-IDLE state, the UE switches from the second DMM network cell to the third DMM network cell, and then switches to the first DMN network cell that is currently connected with the UE, and the second DMM network When the second L-GW is connected to the UE, the UE is assigned an IP address, and when the UE switches to the currently connected first DMM network cell, the UE may continue to use the IP address allocated by the second L-GW.
该通信方法具体可以包括以下歩骤:  The communication method may specifically include the following steps:
歩骤 1001、 UE进行跟踪区域更新触发。  Step 1001: The UE performs a tracking area update trigger.
歩骤 1002、 UE向第一基站发送跟踪区域更新请求。  Step 1002: The UE sends a tracking area update request to the first base station.
歩骤 1003、第一基站向第一 MME发送跟踪区域更新请求, 该跟踪区域 更新请求中携带有 D丽标识和第一 L-GW的地址标识。  Step 1003: The first base station sends a tracking area update request to the first MME, where the tracking area update request carries the Dili identifier and the address identifier of the first L-GW.
歩骤 1004、 第一丽 E向第三 MME发送上下文请求, 用以请求 UE的上 下文信息。  Step 1004: The first MME sends a context request to the third MME to request the uplink information of the UE.
歩骤 1005、第三 MME向第一 MME发送上下文响应, 该上下文响应中携 带有第三 MME中的 UE的上下文信息。 Step 1005: The third MME sends a context response to the first MME, where the context response carries Context information with the UE in the third MME.
歩骤 1006、 第一丽 E向第一 L-GW发送创建会话请求, 该创建会话请 求包括第二 L-GW的地址标识, 其中, 该第二 L-GW在第二 DMM网络中, 并 且该第二 L-GW为 UE分配的 IP地址在 UE切换过程中一直可以被 UE使用。  Step 1006: The first MME sends a create session request to the first L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW, where the second L-GW is in the second DMM network, and the The IP address allocated by the second L-GW to the UE can always be used by the UE during the UE handover process.
歩骤 1007、 第一 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话建立或修改流程。 本实施例中, 如果部署了动态 PCC , 则 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话 建立或修改流程, 并获得 UE的 PCC策略信息。  Step 1007: The first L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF. In this embodiment, if dynamic PCC is deployed, the L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session establishment or modification process to the PCRF, and obtains PCC policy information of the UE.
歩骤 1008、第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 以建立第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的连接。  Step 1008: The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or a modify bearer request to the second L-GW to establish a connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
歩骤 1009、第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。 歩骤 1010、 第一 L-GW向第一 MME发送创建会话响应。  Step 1009: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the first L-GW. Step 1010: The first L-GW sends a create session response to the first MME.
歩骤 101 1、 第一 MME向第三 MME发送上下文响应。  Step 101: The first MME sends a context response to the third MME.
歩骤 1012、 第一丽 E向 HSS发送更新位置。  Step 1012: The first E sends an update location to the HSS.
歩骤 1013、 HSS向第三 MME发送删除位置。  Step 1013: The HSS sends the deletion location to the third MME.
该删除位置用以删除第三丽 E中 UE的上下文。  The deletion location is used to delete the context of the UE in the third ray.
歩骤 1014、 第三丽 E向 HSS发送删除位置响应。  Step 1014: The third ray sends a delete location response to the HSS.
歩骤 1015、 HSS向第一 MME发送更新位置响应。  Step 1015: The HSS sends an update location response to the first MME.
歩骤 1016、 第一丽 E向 UE发送跟踪区域更新接受。  Step 1016: The first E sends a tracking area update acceptance to the UE.
需要说明的是, 如果第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间采用 PMIP协议, 则 歩骤 1008、第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新,相应的,歩骤 1009、 第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定应答消息, 以建立第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的连接。  It should be noted that, if the PMIP protocol is adopted between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, then step 1008, the first L-GW sends a proxy binding update to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, the step 1009. The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response message to the first L-GW to establish a connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
在建立第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的连接之后, 需要释放第三 L-GW 的资源, 具体的, 释放第三 L-GW资源的方法可以为:  After the connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW is established, the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released. Specifically, the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
在图 10所示实施例中的歩骤 1008与歩骤 1009之间还可以执行歩骤: 第三 L-GW收到第二 L-GW发送的绑定撤销指示消息, 则删除关于此 PDN连 接的 EPS承载上下文信息。 或者第三 L-GW资源的释放可以通过歩骤 101 1 和歩骤 1012之间还可以执行歩骤: 第三丽 E向第三 L-GW发送删除会话请 求, 则删除关于此 PDN连接的 EPS承载上下文信息。 需要说明的是, 若 UE 直接从第二网络切换到第一网络, 则不需要第三 L-GW资源释放的过程。 如果第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间采用 GTP协议, 则歩骤 1008、 第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送修改承载请求, 相应的, 歩骤 1009、 第二 L-GW向 第一 L-GW发送修改承载响应消息, 以建立第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的 连接。 A step may be further performed between the step 1008 and the step 1009 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10: the third L-GW receives the binding revocation indication message sent by the second L-GW, and deletes the PDN connection. The EPS carries context information. Or the release of the third L-GW resource may be further performed by the step 101 1 and the step 1012: the third E sends a delete session request to the third L-GW, and the EPS about the PDN connection is deleted. Host context information. It should be noted that if the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required. If the GTP protocol is adopted between the first L-GW and the second L-GW, then the first L-GW sends a modify bearer request to the second L-GW, and correspondingly, step 1009, the second L- The GW sends a modify bearer response message to the first L-GW to establish a connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
在建立第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的连接之后, 需要释放第三 L-GW 的资源, 具体的, 释放第三 L-GW资源的方法可以为:  After the connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW is established, the resource of the third L-GW needs to be released. Specifically, the method for releasing the third L-GW resource may be:
在图 10所示实施例中的歩骤 101 1与歩骤 1012之间还可以执行歩骤: 第三丽 E向第三 L-GW发送删除会话请求, 则删除关于此 PDN连接的 EPS 承载上下文信息。  Steps may be further performed between step 101 1 and step 1012 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10: the third E sends a delete session request to the third L-GW, and then the EPS bearer context about the PDN connection is deleted. information.
需要说明的是, 若 UE直接从第二网络切换到第一网络, 则不需要第 三 L-GW资源释放的过程。  It should be noted that if the UE directly switches from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required.
需要说明的是, 在本实施例一实现方式中, 若 UE从第二 DMM网络切 换到第三 EPS网络, 再切换到第一 DMM网络, 并且, 在 UE当前连接的第 一 DMM网络中, 第一 L-GW与第一 MME之间设置有接口的场景下, UE切换 的方法的基本原理与图 10所示实施例的基本原理基本相同, 区别在于, 第三 L-GW相应于 P-GW, 并且第三网络中需要增加 S-GW资源释放的过程, 即在第三 P-GW收到第二 L-GW发送的绑定撤销指示消息之后可以执行歩 骤: 第三 P-GW向第三 S-GW发送删除承载请求, 第三 S-GW向第三 P-GW发 送删除承载响应; 或者, 第一丽 E向第三丽 E发送上下文响应之后, 第三 MME向第三 S-GW发送删除会话请求, 和第三 S-GW向第三 MME发送删除会 话响应。 若 UE直接从第二网络切换到第一网络, 则不需要第三 L-GW资源 释放的过程。 并且若 UE直接从第二 EPS网络切换到第一 DMM网络, 则第 二 L-GW相当于 P-GW, 并且第二网络中需要增加 S-GW资源释放的过程, 即 在第二 P-GW收到第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定更新或修改承载请求之后, 向 第二 S-GW发送删除承载请求, 第二 S-GW向第二 P-GW发送删除承载响应; 或者, 第一 MME向第二 MME发送上下文响应之后, 第二 MME向第二 S_GW 发送删除会话请求, 和第二 S-GW向第二 MME发送删除会话响应。  It should be noted that, in an implementation manner of this embodiment, if the UE switches from the second DMM network to the third EPS network, and then switches to the first DMM network, and in the first DMM network that the UE is currently connected, In a scenario where an interface is provided between an L-GW and the first MME, the basic principle of the UE handover method is basically the same as the basic principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. 10, except that the third L-GW corresponds to the P-GW. And the process of the S-GW resource release is required to be performed in the third network, that is, after the third P-GW receives the binding revocation indication message sent by the second L-GW, the third P-GW may perform the following steps: The third S-GW sends a delete bearer request, and the third S-GW sends a delete bearer response to the third P-GW; or, after the first MME sends a context response to the third MME, the third MME sends the third S-GW to the third S-GW. Sending a delete session request, and the third S-GW sends a delete session response to the third MME. If the UE switches directly from the second network to the first network, the process of releasing the third L-GW resource is not required. And if the UE directly switches from the second EPS network to the first DMM network, the second L-GW is equivalent to the P-GW, and the process of releasing the S-GW resource needs to be added in the second network, that is, in the second P-GW. After receiving the proxy binding update or modifying the bearer request sent by the first L-GW, sending a delete bearer request to the second S-GW, and sending, by the second S-GW, the delete bearer response to the second P-GW; or, the first After the MME sends the context response to the second MME, the second MME sends a delete session request to the second S_GW, and the second S-GW sends a delete session response to the second MME.
在本实施例一实现方法中, 若 UE从第二 DMM网络切换到第三 EPS网 络, 再切换到第一 EPS网络, 则 UE在后续的 EPS网络中切换的流程可以 根据现有技术的 EPS流程即可, 因此, 在此说明 UE从第二 DMM网络切换 到第三 EPS网络的一次重建过程。 UE从第二 DMM网络切换到第三 EPS网络 的流程如图 10所示实施例基本相同, 区别在于, 第一 L-GW相应于 P-GW, 并且,在歩骤 1003中该跟踪区域更新请求中不携带有 D丽标识和第一 L-GW 的地址标识。 In the implementation method of the first embodiment, if the UE switches from the second DMM network to the third EPS network and then switches to the first EPS network, the process of the UE switching in the subsequent EPS network may be according to the EPS process of the prior art. That is, therefore, the UE is switched from the second DMM network here. A reconstruction process to the third EPS network. The process of the UE switching from the second DMM network to the third EPS network is basically the same as the embodiment shown in FIG. 10, except that the first L-GW corresponds to the P-GW, and the tracking area update request is received in step 1003. The Dili logo and the address identifier of the first L-GW are not carried in the middle.
图 1 1为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图;如图 1 1所示, FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG.
UE可以在不同基站, 即第一基站与第三基站之间进行切换, 并且第一基站 和第三基站对应同一 L-GW。本实施例的一种适用场景是, 第一基站与第一 MME之间没有设置接口, 其中, 在 MME没有发生重定位的场景下, 该通信 方法包括: The UE may perform handover between different base stations, that is, the first base station and the third base station, and the first base station and the third base station correspond to the same L-GW. An applicable scenario in this embodiment is that the interface is not configured between the first eNB and the first MME, where the communication method includes:
歩骤 1 101、 第一基站向第一 L-GW发送修改承载请求。  Step 1 101: The first base station sends a modify bearer request to the first L-GW.
在本实施例中, 该修改承载请求用于更新第一 L-GW中 UE的下行数据 传输的 IP地址和 TEID ,即修改第一 L-GW中第三基站的信息为第一基站的 ^ I Ft自Θ、。  In this embodiment, the modified bearer request is used to update the IP address and the TEID of the downlink data transmission of the UE in the first L-GW, that is, the information of the third base station in the first L-GW is modified as the first base station. Ft is self-defeating.
歩骤 1 102、 第一 L-GW向第一基站发送修改承载响应。  Step 1 102: The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first base station.
歩骤 1 103、 第一基站向第一 ΜΜΕ发送路径切换请求。  Step 1 103: The first base station sends a path switch request to the first node.
需要说明的是, 该路径切换请求中携带有 D丽标识。  It should be noted that the path switching request carries the Dili identifier.
歩骤 1 104、 第一基站接收第一 ΜΜΕ发送的路径切换响应。  Step 1 104: The first base station receives a path switch response sent by the first port.
歩骤 1 105、 第一基站向第三基站发送资源释放请求。  Step 1 105: The first base station sends a resource release request to the third base station.
该资源释放请求以使第二基站释放与 UE之间的资源。  The resource release request causes the second base station to release resources with the UE.
歩骤 1 106、 UE执行跟踪区域更新过程。  Step 1 106: The UE performs a tracking area update process.
图 12为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图;如图 12所示, UE可以在不同基站, 即第一基站与第三基站之间进行切换, 并且第一基站 和第三基站对应同一 L-GW。本实施例的一种适用场景是, 第一基站与第一 MME之间设置有接口, 其中, 在 MME没有发生重定位的场景下, 该通信方 法包括:  12 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 12, a UE may perform handover between different base stations, that is, a first base station and a third base station, and the first base station and the third base station Corresponding to the same L-GW. An applicable scenario in this embodiment is that an interface is configured between the first base station and the first MME, where the communication method includes:
歩骤 1201、第一基站向第一 MME发送路径切换请求, 该路径切换请求 中携带有 D丽标识和第一 L-GW的地址标识。  Step 1201: The first base station sends a path switch request to the first MME, where the path switch request carries the Dili identifier and the address identifier of the first L-GW.
歩骤 1202、 第一丽 E向第一 L-GW发送修改承载请求。  Step 1202: The first MME sends a modify bearer request to the first L-GW.
在本实施例中, 该修改承载请求用于更新第一 L-GW中 UE的下行数据 传输的 IP地址和 TEID ,即修改第一 L-GW中第三基站的信息为第一基站的 信息。 In this embodiment, the modified bearer request is used to update the IP address and the TEID of the downlink data transmission of the UE in the first L-GW, that is, the information of the third base station in the first L-GW is modified to be the first base station. Information.
歩骤 1203、 第一 L-GW向第一 MME发送修改承载响应。  Step 1203: The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first MME.
歩骤 1204、 第一丽 E向第一基站发送路径切换响应。  Step 1204: The first switch sends a path switch response to the first base station.
歩骤 1205、 第一基站向第三基站发送资源释放请求。  Step 1205: The first base station sends a resource release request to the third base station.
该资源释放请求以使第三基站释放与 UE之间的资源,即释放 UE与 UE 切换到第一基站之前所连接的第三基站之间的资源。  The resource release request causes the third base station to release resources between the UE and the UE, that is, to release resources between the UE and the third base station to which the UE is connected before switching to the first base station.
歩骤 1206、 UE执行跟踪区域更新过程。  Step 1206: The UE performs a tracking area update process.
图 13为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图;如图 13所示, UE可以在不同基站, 即第一基站与第三基站之间进行切换, 并且第一基站 和第三基站对应同一 L-GW。本实施例的一种适用场景是, 第一基站与第一 MME之间没有设置接口, 其中, 在 MME发生重定位的场景下, 该通信方法 包括:  13 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 13, a UE may perform handover between different base stations, that is, a first base station and a third base station, and the first base station and the third base station Corresponding to the same L-GW. An application scenario in this embodiment is that the interface between the first eNB and the first MME is not set. In the scenario where the MME is relocated, the communication method includes:
歩骤 1301、 第一基站与第三基站之间进行决策触发切换。  Step 1301: Perform a decision trigger switch between the first base station and the third base station.
歩骤 1302、 第三基站向第三 MME发送切换请求。  Step 1302: The third base station sends a handover request to the third MME.
歩骤 1303、 第三丽 E向第一 MME发送转发重定位请求。  Step 1303: The third MME sends a forwarding relocation request to the first MME.
歩骤 1304、 第一丽 E向第一基站发送切换请求。  Step 1304: The first E sends a handover request to the first base station.
歩骤 1305、 第一基站向第一 MME发送切换请求响应。  Step 1305: The first base station sends a handover request response to the first MME.
该切换请求响应携带有 D丽标识。  The handover request response carries a Dili identity.
歩骤 1306、 第一丽 E向第三丽 E发送转发重定位响应。  Step 1306: The first ray sends a forwarding relocation response to the third ray E.
歩骤 1307、 第三丽 E向第三基站发送切换命令。  Step 1307: The third E sends a handover command to the third base station.
歩骤 1308、 第三基站向 UE发送切换命令。  Step 1308: The third base station sends a handover command to the UE.
歩骤 1309、 UE向第一基站发送切换确认。  Step 1309: The UE sends a handover confirmation to the first base station.
歩骤 1310、 第一基站向第一 L-GW发送修改承载请求。  Step 1310: The first base station sends a modify bearer request to the first L-GW.
该修改承载请求用于更新第一 L-GW中 UE的下行数据传输的 IP地址 和 TEID , 即修改第一 L-GW中第三基站的信息为第一基站的信息。  The modified bearer request is used to update the IP address and the TEID of the downlink data transmission of the UE in the first L-GW, that is, the information of the third base station in the first L-GW is modified as the information of the first base station.
歩骤 131 1、 第一 L-GW向第一基站发送修改承载响应。  Step 131: The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first base station.
歩骤 1312、 第一基站向第一 MME发送切换通知。  Step 1312: The first base station sends a handover notification to the first MME.
歩骤 1313、 UE执行跟踪区域更新过程。  Step 1313: The UE performs a tracking area update process.
图 14为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图;如图 14所示, UE可以在不同基站, 即第一基站与第三基站之间进行切换, 并且第一基站 和第三基站对应同一 L-GW。本实施例的一种适用场景是, 第一基站与第一 丽 E之间设置有接口, 其中, 在 MME发生重定位的场景下, 该通信方法包 括: 14 is a schematic diagram of a signaling flow of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 14, a UE may perform handover between different base stations, that is, a first base station and a third base station, and the first base station Corresponding to the same L-GW as the third base station. An application scenario in this embodiment is that an interface is configured between the first base station and the first MME, and the communication method includes:
 Cong
少 1401、 弟一基站与第三基站之间进行决策触发切换。  Less 1401, the decision between the base station and the third base station is triggered to switch.
 Cong
少 1402、 弟二基站向第三 MME发送切换请求。  The less than 1402, the second base station sends a handover request to the third MME.
 Cong
少 1403、 弟二 . MME向第一 MME发送转发重定位请求。  Less 1403, second brother. The MME sends a forward relocation request to the first MME.
 Cong
少 1404、 弟一 MME向第一基站发送切换请求。  Less than 1404, the MME sends a handover request to the first base station.
 Cong
少 1405、 弟一基站向第一 MME发送切换请求通知。  Less than 1405, the second base station sends a handover request notification to the first MME.
该切换请求通知携带有 D丽标识和第一 L-GW地址标识。  The handover request notification carries the Dili identity and the first L-GW address identifier.
歩骤 1406、 第一 MME向第三 MME发送转发重定位响应。  Step 1406: The first MME sends a forwarding relocation response to the third MME.
歩骤 1407、 第三丽 E向第三基站发送切换命令。  Step 1407: The third E sends a handover command to the third base station.
歩骤 1408、 第三基站向 UE发送切换命令。  Step 1408: The third base station sends a handover command to the UE.
歩骤 1409、 UE向第一基站发送切换确认。  Step 1409: The UE sends a handover confirmation to the first base station.
歩骤 1410、 第一基站向第一 MME发送切换通知。  Step 1410: The first base station sends a handover notification to the first MME.
歩骤 141 1、 第一丽 E向第一 L-GW发送修改承载请求。  Step 141 1. The first E sends a modify bearer request to the first L-GW.
该修改承载请求用于更新第一 L-GW中 UE的下行数据传输的 IP地址 和 TEID , 即修改第一 L-GW中第三基站的信息为第一基站的信息。  The modified bearer request is used to update the IP address and the TEID of the downlink data transmission of the UE in the first L-GW, that is, the information of the third base station in the first L-GW is modified as the information of the first base station.
歩骤 1412、 第一 L-GW向第一 MME发送修改承载响应。  Step 1412: The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first MME.
歩骤 1413、 UE执行跟踪区域更新过程。  Step 1413: The UE performs a tracking area update process.
图 15为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图;如图 15所示, 本实施例的适用场景是, UE在不同小区之间进行切换, 并且该些小区的网 络架构相同, 即 D丽 网络, 并且, 在 UE与当前小区建立 PDN连接之后, UE可以发起 PDN连接去连接, 可以释放 UE不再需要的 PDN连接。 UE释放 UE当前连接的 DMM网络与 UE之前连接的 D丽网络之间的 L_GW的隧道或承 载信息,即第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的资源。在 DMM网络中的 MME与 L-GW 之间没有设置接口得场景下, 第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间进行资源释放可 以包括如下歩骤:  FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a signaling procedure of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 15, the applicable scenario in this embodiment is that a UE performs handover between different cells, and the network architectures of the cells are the same, that is, The D-network, and after the UE establishes a PDN connection with the current cell, the UE may initiate a PDN connection to connect, and may release a PDN connection that the UE no longer needs. The UE releases the tunnel or bearer information of the L_GW between the DMM network currently connected by the UE and the D-network connected to the UE, that is, the resource between the first L-GW and the second L-GW. In the scenario that no interface is set between the MME and the L-GW in the DMM network, the resource release between the first L-GW and the second L-GW may include the following steps:
歩骤 1501、 UE向 MME发送 PDN连接去连接请求。  Step 1501: The UE sends a PDN connection to the MME to connect to the MME.
本实施例中的 MME是对应第一 L-GW的。 UE可以通过基站向 MME发送 PDN连接去连接请求, 该 PDN连接去连接请求用以去连接 UE与第二 L_GW 之间的 PDN连接, 该第二 L-GW为 UE连接当前 DMM网络之前连接的 L_GW。 歩骤 1502、 MME向基站发送去激活承载请求。 The MME in this embodiment corresponds to the first L-GW. The UE may send a PDN connection de-connection request to the MME through the base station, where the PDN connection de-connection request is used to connect the UE to the second L_GW. A PDN connection between the second L-GW and the L_GW connected before the UE connects to the current DMM network. Step 1502: The MME sends a deactivation bearer request to the base station.
具体的, 该基站是当前与 UE连接的基站, MME向转发 PDN连接去连接 请求的基站发送去激活承载请求。  Specifically, the base station is a base station currently connected to the UE, and the MME sends a deactivation bearer request to the base station that forwards the PDN connection to the connection request.
歩骤 1503、 该基站向第一 L-GW发送删除会话请求。  Step 1503: The base station sends a delete session request to the first L-GW.
歩骤 1504、第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或删除会话请求。 在本实施例中, UE与第二 L-GW之间可能有多条 PDN连接资源, 因此, 该代理绑定更新中携带有第二 L-GW为 UE分配的 IP地址, 以删除该 IP地 址对应的 PDN连接。 或者删除会话请求中包含 LBI ( Linked EPS Bearer Identifier, 默认承载标识) , 用以删除第一 L_GW与第二 L_GW之间的默 认承载标识为 LBI的 PDN连接。  Step 1504: The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW. In this embodiment, there may be multiple PDN connection resources between the UE and the second L-GW. Therefore, the proxy binding update carries the IP address assigned by the second L-GW to the UE, to delete the IP address. Corresponding PDN connection. Or deleting the session request includes an LBI (Linked EPS Bearer Identifier), which is used to delete the PDN connection whose default bearer identifier is LBI between the first L_GW and the second L_GW.
歩骤 1505、 第二 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话终止流程。  Step 1505: The second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination process to the PCRF.
本实施例中, 如果部署了动态 PCC, 则第二 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN 会话终止流程。  In this embodiment, if a dynamic PCC is deployed, the second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
歩骤 1506、第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。 歩骤 1507、 第一 L-GW向基站发送删除会话响应, 用以对删除会话请 求的响应。  Step 1506: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes the session response to the first L-GW. Step 1507: The first L-GW sends a delete session response to the base station, in response to deleting the session request.
歩骤 1508、 基站向 UE发送 RRC连接重配置信息, 用以修改空口信令 连接。  Step 1508: The base station sends RRC connection reconfiguration information to the UE, to modify the air interface signaling connection.
歩骤 1509、 UE向基站发送 RRC连接重配置完成信息。  Step 1509: The UE sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the base station.
歩骤 1510、 基站向 MME发送去激活承载响应。  Step 1510: The base station sends a deactivation bearer response to the MME.
该去激活承载响应用以告知丽 E已经完成删除第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW 之间的 PDN连接。  The deactivation bearer response is used to inform the MN that the PDN connection between the first L-GW and the second L-GW has been deleted.
歩骤 1511、 UE向基站发送直传消息。  Step 1511: The UE sends a direct transmission message to the base station.
该直传消息携带有去激活 EPS承载上下文接受消息。  The direct transmission message carries a deactivated EPS bearer context accept message.
歩骤 1512、 基站向 MME发送去激活 EPS承载上下文接受消息。  Step 1512: The base station sends a deactivated EPS bearer context accept message to the MME.
需要说明的是, UE 也可以在不同网络架构的小区之间进行切换, 即 EPS网络与 D丽网络之间进行切换,无论 UE当前连接的是 DMM网络,或者, UE当前连接的是 EPS网络, 原理与图 15所示实施例的原理基本类似, 区 别在于第二 L-GW对应于 P-GW或第一 L-GW对应 P_GW。 需要说明的是, PDN连接的去连接也可以由 MME发起, 例如当 UE签约 数据修改或资源缺乏等原因, MME决定释放 UE的 PDN连接。 It should be noted that the UE may also switch between cells of different network architectures, that is, switch between the EPS network and the Dali network, whether the UE is currently connected to the DMM network, or the UE is currently connected to the EPS network. The principle is basically similar to the principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. 15, except that the second L-GW corresponds to the P-GW or the first L-GW corresponds to the P_GW. It should be noted that the detachment of the PDN connection may also be initiated by the MME. For example, when the UE subscribes to data modification or lack of resources, the MME decides to release the PDN connection of the UE.
对 UE的某条 PDN连接的去连接,可以由 UE发起 PDN连接去连接请求, 或者由 MME触发 PDN连接去连接。  For the de-connection of a certain PDN connection of the UE, the PDN connection may be initiated by the UE to connect to the connection, or the MME may trigger the PDN connection to connect.
图 16为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图;如图 16所示, 本实施例的适用场景是, UE在不同小区之间进行切换, 并且该些小区的网 络架构相同, 即 D丽网络, 并且, 在 UE与当前小区建立 PDN连接之后, UE可以发起 PDN连接去连接, 可以释放 UE不再需要的 PDN连接。 UE释放 UE当前连接的 DMM网络与 UE之前连接的 D丽网络之间的 L_GW的隧道或承 载信息,即第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间的资源。在 DMM网络中的 MME与 L-GW 之间存在接口的场景下, 第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之间进行资源释放可以包 括如下歩骤:  FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of a signaling procedure of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 16, the applicable scenario in this embodiment is that a UE performs handover between different cells, and the network architectures of the cells are the same, that is, The D-network, and after the UE establishes a PDN connection with the current cell, the UE may initiate a PDN connection to connect, and may release a PDN connection that the UE no longer needs. The UE releases the tunnel or bearer information of the L_GW between the DMM network currently connected by the UE and the D-network connected to the UE, that is, the resource between the first L-GW and the second L-GW. In the scenario that an interface exists between the MME and the L-GW in the DMM network, the resource release between the first L-GW and the second L-GW may include the following steps:
歩骤 1601、 UE通过基站向 MME发送 PDN连接去连接请求。  Step 1601: The UE sends a PDN connection to the MME through the base station to connect to the MME.
具体的, UE通过与 UE相连的基站向 MME发送 PDN连接去连接请求, 该 PDN连接去连接请求用以去连接 UE与第二 L-GW之间的 PDN连接, 该第 二 L-GW为 UE连接当前 D丽网络之前连接的 L-GW。  Specifically, the UE sends a PDN connection de-connection request to the MME through a base station connected to the UE, where the PDN connection de-connection request is used to connect the PDN connection between the UE and the second L-GW, where the second L-GW is the UE. Connect to the L-GW connected before the current Delicate network.
PDN连接的去连接也可以由 MME发起,例如当 UE签约数据修改或资源 缺乏等原因, MME决定释放 UE的 PDN连接。  The detachment of the PDN connection may also be initiated by the MME. For example, when the UE subscribes to data modification or lack of resources, the MME decides to release the PDN connection of the UE.
对 UE的某条 PDN连接的去连接,可以由 UE发起 PDN连接去连接请求, 或者由 MME触发 PDN连接去连接。  For the de-connection of a certain PDN connection of the UE, the PDN connection may be initiated by the UE to connect to the connection, or the MME may trigger the PDN connection to connect.
歩骤 1602、 MME向第一 L-GW发送删除会话请求。  Step 1602: The MME sends a delete session request to the first L-GW.
歩骤 1603、第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或删除会话请求。 在本实施例中, UE与第二 L-GW之间可能有多条 PDN连接资源, 因此, 该代理绑定更新中携带有第二 L-GW为 UE分配的 IP地址, 以删除该 IP地 址对应的 PDN连接。 或者删除会话请求中包含 LBI , 用以删除第一 L_GW 与第二 L-GW之间的默认承载标识为 LBI的 PDN连接。  Step 1603: The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW. In this embodiment, there may be multiple PDN connection resources between the UE and the second L-GW. Therefore, the proxy binding update carries the IP address assigned by the second L-GW to the UE, to delete the IP address. Corresponding PDN connection. Or deleting the session request includes an LBI, and deleting the PDN connection with the default bearer identifier LBI between the first L_GW and the second L-GW.
歩骤 1604、 第二 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话终止流程。  Step 1604: The second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
本实施例中, 如果部署了动态 PCC , 则 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话 终止流程。  In this embodiment, if dynamic PCC is deployed, the L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
歩骤 1605、第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定应答或删除会话响应。 歩骤 1606、 第一 L-GW向 MME发送删除会话响应。 Step 1605: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW. Step 1606: The first L-GW sends a delete session response to the MME.
具体的, 该 MME是与第一 L-GW对应的 MME , 第一 L_GW向 MME发送删 除会话响应, 用以对删除会话请求的响应。  Specifically, the MME is an MME corresponding to the first L-GW, and the first L_GW sends a delete session response to the MME, in response to deleting the session request.
歩骤 1607、 MME向基站发送去激活承载请求。  Step 1607: The MME sends a deactivation bearer request to the base station.
具体的, 该基站是与第一 L-GW相连的, 即对应第一 L-GW的基站。 该 去激活承载请求用以去激活 UE与 MME之间的 PDN连接的所有的承载。  Specifically, the base station is connected to the first L-GW, that is, the base station corresponding to the first L-GW. The deactivation bearer request is used to deactivate all bearers of the PDN connection between the UE and the MME.
具体的, 该基站为在歩骤 1601中转发 PDN连接去连接请求的基站。 歩骤 1608、 基站向 UE发送 RRC连接重配置信息, 用以修改空口信令 连接。  Specifically, the base station is a base station that forwards the PDN connection de-connection request in step 1601. Step 1608: The base station sends RRC connection reconfiguration information to the UE, to modify the air interface signaling connection.
歩骤 1609、 UE向基站发送 RRC连接重配置完成信息 。  Step 1609: The UE sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the base station.
本实施例 UE向基站发送 RRC连接重配置完成信息, 从而完成了 UE与 基站之间 RRC连接的重配置。  In this embodiment, the UE sends the RRC connection reconfiguration complete information to the base station, thereby completing the reconfiguration of the RRC connection between the UE and the base station.
歩骤 1610、 基站向 MME发送去激活承载响应。  Step 1610: The base station sends a deactivation bearer response to the MME.
歩骤 161 1、 UE向基站发送直传消息。  Step 161 1. The UE sends a direct transmission message to the base station.
该直传消息携带有去激活 EPS承载上下文接受消息。  The direct transmission message carries a deactivated EPS bearer context accept message.
歩骤 1612、 基站向 MME发送去激活承载上下文接受消息。  Step 1612: The base station sends a deactivation bearer context accept message to the MME.
需要说明的是, UE 也可以在不同网络架构的小区之间进行切换, 即 EPS网络与 D丽网络之间进行切换, 若 UE当前连接的是 DMM网络, 则与图 16所示实施例的原理基本相同, 区别在于第二 L-GW对应于 P-GW, 其余相 同部分不再赘述。 若 UE当前连接的是 EPS网络, 则与图 16所示实施例的 原理基本相同, 区别在于第一 L-GW对应于 S-GW或 P-GW, 具体的, 图 16 所示实施例中的歩骤 1602对应为 MME通过 S-GW向 P_GW发送删除会话请 求, 接着, 歩骤 1603对应为 P-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或删除 会话请求, 其中, 第二 L-GW为 UE之前连接的 L-GW, 其余相同部分不再赘 述。  It should be noted that the UE may also switch between cells of different network architectures, that is, switch between the EPS network and the Dali network. If the UE is currently connected to the DMM network, the principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. Basically the same, the difference is that the second L-GW corresponds to the P-GW, and the rest of the same parts will not be described again. If the UE is currently connected to the EPS network, the principle is basically the same as that of the embodiment shown in FIG. 16. The difference is that the first L-GW corresponds to the S-GW or the P-GW. Specifically, in the embodiment shown in FIG. Step 1602 corresponds to the MME sending a delete session request to the P_GW through the S-GW, and then, step 1603 corresponds to the P-GW sending a proxy binding update or deletion session request to the second L-GW, where the second L-GW For the L-GW to which the UE is previously connected, the rest of the same parts will not be described again.
图 17为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图;如图 17所示, 本实施例的适用场景是, UE在不同小区之间进行切换, 并且该些小区的网 络架构相同, 即 D丽网络, 并且, 在 UE与当前小区建立 PDN连接之后, UE可以发起去附着请求, 以释放 UE与网络之间的连接。 在 DMM网络中的 MME与 L-GW之间没有接口的场景下, UE的去附着可以包括如下歩骤: 歩骤 1701、 UE通过基站向 MME发起去附着请求。 FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a signaling procedure of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 17, the applicable scenario of the present embodiment is that a UE performs handover between different cells, and the network architectures of the cells are the same, that is, The D-network, and after the UE establishes a PDN connection with the current cell, the UE may initiate a detach request to release the connection between the UE and the network. In a scenario where there is no interface between the MME and the L-GW in the DMM network, the detaching of the UE may include the following steps: Step 1701: The UE initiates a detach request to the MME by using the base station.
该去附着请求用以请求 UE的去附着。  The detach request is used to request detachment of the UE.
在本实施例中, MME是与第一 L-GW对应的丽 E, 当前 UE通过该基站 与该第一 L-GW连接。  In this embodiment, the MME is a MN corresponding to the first L-GW, and the current UE is connected to the first L-GW through the base station.
歩骤 1702、 MME向基站发送去激活承载请求。  Step 1702: The MME sends a deactivation bearer request to the base station.
UE与 L-GW之间可能有多条 PDN连接, MME针对每条 PDN连接发送去 激活承载请求。每一个去激活承载请求中包含 LBI,用以去激活 UE与 L-GW 之间的默认承载标识为 LBI的 PDN连接。  There may be multiple PDN connections between the UE and the L-GW, and the MME sends a deactivation bearer request for each PDN connection. Each deactivation bearer request includes an LBI for deactivating a PDN connection between the UE and the L-GW with a default bearer identifier of LBI.
歩骤 1703、 基站向对应的第一 L-GW发送删除会话请求, 以使对应的 第一 L-GW删除已建立的 PDN连接;  Step 1703: The base station sends a delete session request to the corresponding first L-GW, so that the corresponding first L-GW deletes the established PDN connection.
歩骤 1704、第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或删除会话请求。 在本实施例中, UE与第二 L-GW之间可能有多条 PDN连接, 因此, 该 代理绑定更新中携带有第二 L-GW为 UE分配的 IP地址, 以删除该 IP地址 对应的 PDN 连接。 或者删除会话请求中包含 LBI ( Linked EPS Bearer Identifier, 默认承载标识) , 用以删除第一 L_GW与第二 L_GW之间的默 认承载标识为 LBI的 PDN连接。  Step 1704: The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW. In this embodiment, there may be multiple PDN connections between the UE and the second L-GW. Therefore, the proxy binding update carries the IP address assigned by the second L-GW to the UE, to delete the IP address. PDN connection. Or deleting the session request includes an LBI (Linked EPS Bearer Identifier), which is used to delete the PDN connection whose default bearer identifier is LBI between the first L_GW and the second L_GW.
歩骤 1705、 第二 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话终止流程。  Step 1705: The second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination process to the PCRF.
本实施例中, 如果部署了动态 PCC, 则第二 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN 会话终止流程。  In this embodiment, if a dynamic PCC is deployed, the second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
歩骤 1706、第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。 歩骤 1707、 第一 L-GW向基站发送删除会话响应。  Step 1706: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW. Step 1707: The first L-GW sends a delete session response to the base station.
歩骤 1708、基站向 MME发送去激活承载响应, 用以对去激活承载请求 的响应。  Step 1708: The base station sends a deactivation bearer response to the MME to respond to the deactivation of the bearer request.
歩骤 1709、 MME通过基站向 UE发送去附着接受消息。  Step 1709: The MME sends a detach accept message to the UE by using the base station.
歩骤 1710、 基站与 UE之间进行 RRC连接释放。  Step 1710: Perform RRC connection release between the base station and the UE.
也就是说, MME通过 UE上下文释放命令(UE Context Release Co匪 and) 指示基站与 UE之间进行空口信令连接释放, 之后基站通过 UE上下文释放 完成 (UE Context Release Complete ) 消息告知 MME RRC连接成功释放。  That is, the MME indicates that the air interface signaling connection is released between the base station and the UE through the UE context release command (UE Context Release Co匪and), and then the base station informs the MME that the RRC connection is successful through the UE Context Release Complete message. freed.
需要说明的是, UE 也可以在不同网络架构的小区之间进行切换, 即 EPS网络与 DMM网络之间进行切换,无论 UE当前连接的是 DMM网络,或者, UE当前连接的是 EPS网络, 原理与图 17所示实施例的原理基本类似, 区 别在于第二 L-GW对应于 P-GW或第一 L-GW对应 P_GW It should be noted that the UE may also switch between cells of different network architectures, that is, switch between the EPS network and the DMM network, regardless of whether the UE is currently connected to the DMM network, or The UE is currently connected to the EPS network, and the principle is basically similar to the principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. 17, except that the second L-GW corresponds to the P-GW or the first L-GW corresponds to the P_GW.
图 18为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图; 如图 18所示 本实施例的适用场景是, UE在不同小区之间进行切换, 并且该些小区的网 络架构相同, 即 D丽网络, 并且, 在 UE与当前小区建立 PDN连接之后, UE可以发起去附着请求, 以释放 UE与网络之间的连接。 在 DMM网络中的 MME与 L-GW之间存在接口的场景下, UE的去附着可以包括如下歩骤: 歩骤 1801 UE通过基站向 MME发起去附着请求。  FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of a signaling procedure of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 18, the applicable scenario is that the UE performs handover between different cells, and the network architectures of the cells are the same, that is, D The network, and after the UE establishes a PDN connection with the current cell, the UE may initiate a detach request to release the connection between the UE and the network. In a scenario where an interface exists between the MME and the L-GW in the DMM network, the detaching of the UE may include the following steps: Step 1801 The UE initiates a detach request to the MME by using the base station.
歩骤 1802 MME向第一 L-GW发送删除会话请求。  Step 1802: The MME sends a delete session request to the first L-GW.
该删除会话请求以使第一 L-GW删除已建立的 PDN连接。  The delete session request causes the first L-GW to delete the established PDN connection.
歩骤 1803、第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或删除会话请求。 在本实施例中, UE与第二 L-GW之间可能有多条 PDN连接资源, 因此, 该代理绑定更新中携带有第二 L-GW为 UE分配的 IP地址, 以删除该 IP地 址对应的 PDN连接。或者删除会话请求中包含 LBI , 以删除第一 L-GW与第 二 L-GW之间的默认承载标识为 LBI的 PDN连接。  Step 1803: The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW. In this embodiment, there may be multiple PDN connection resources between the UE and the second L-GW. Therefore, the proxy binding update carries the IP address assigned by the second L-GW to the UE, to delete the IP address. Corresponding PDN connection. Or deleting the LBI included in the session request to delete the PDN connection with the default bearer identifier LBI between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
歩骤 1804、 第二 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话终止流程。  Step 1804: The second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
本实施例中, 如果部署了动态 PCC, 则第二 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN 会话终止流程。  In this embodiment, if a dynamic PCC is deployed, the second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
歩骤 1805、第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。 歩骤 1806、 第一 L-GW向 MME发送删除会话响应。  Step 1805: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes the session response to the first L-GW. Step 1806: The first L-GW sends a delete session response to the MME.
歩骤 1807 MME向 UE发送去附着接受消息。  Step 1807: The MME sends a detach accept message to the UE.
歩骤 1808、 基站与 UE之间进行 RRC连接释放。  Step 1808: Perform an RRC connection release between the base station and the UE.
也就是说, MME通过 UE上下文释放命令(UE Context Rel ease Co and ) 指示基站与 UE之间进行空口信令连接释放, 之后基站通过 UE上下文释放 完成 (UE Context Release Complete ) 消息告知 MME RRC连接成功释放。  That is, the MME indicates that the air interface signaling connection is released between the base station and the UE through the UE context release command (UE Context Rel ease Co and ), and then the base station informs the MME that the RRC connection is successful through the UE Context Release Complete message. freed.
需要说明的是, UE 也可以在不同网络架构的小区之间进行切换, 即 EPS网络与 D丽网络之间进行切换, 若 UE当前连接的是 DMM网络, 则与图 18所示实施例的原理基本相同, 区别在于第二 L-GW对应于 P-GW, 其余相 同部分不再赘述。 若 UE当前连接的是 EPS网络, 则与图 18所示实施例的 原理基本相同, 区别在于第一 L-GW对应于 S-GW或 P-GW, 具体的, 图 18 所示实施例中的歩骤 1802对应为 MME通过 S-GW向 P_GW发送删除会话请 求, 接着, 歩骤 1803对应为 P-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或删除 会话请求, 其中, 第二 L-GW为 UE之前连接的 L-GW, 其余相同部分不再赘 述。 It should be noted that the UE may also switch between cells of different network architectures, that is, switch between the EPS network and the Dali network. If the UE is currently connected to the DMM network, the principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. Basically the same, the difference is that the second L-GW corresponds to the P-GW, and the rest of the same parts will not be described again. If the UE is currently connected to the EPS network, the principle is basically the same as that of the embodiment shown in FIG. 18, except that the first L-GW corresponds to the S-GW or the P-GW. Specifically, FIG. 18 Step 1802 in the illustrated embodiment corresponds to the MME sending a delete session request to the P_GW through the S-GW, and then, in step 1803, the P-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW, where The second L-GW is the L-GW connected before the UE, and the rest of the same parts are not described again.
图 19为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图; 如图 19所示 本实施例的适用场景是, UE在不同小区之间进行切换, 并且该些小区的网 络架构相同, 即 D丽网络, 并且, 在 UE与当前小区建立 PDN连接之后, MME可以发起去附着请求, 以释放 UE与网络之间的连接。在 DMM网络中的 MME与 L-GW之间不存在接口的场景下, UE的去附着可以包括如下歩骤: 歩骤 1901、 MME通过基站向 UE发起去附着请求。  FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of a signaling procedure of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 19, the applicable scenario is that the UE performs handover between different cells, and the network architectures of the cells are the same, that is, D The network, and after the UE establishes a PDN connection with the current cell, the MME may initiate a detach request to release the connection between the UE and the network. In a scenario where there is no interface between the MME and the L-GW in the DMM network, the detaching of the UE may include the following steps: Step 1901: The MME initiates a detach request to the UE by using the base station.
该去附着请求用以通知 UE去附着。  The detach request is used to notify the UE to attach.
歩骤 1902、 MME向基站发送去激活承载请求。  Step 1902: The MME sends a deactivation bearer request to the base station.
歩骤 1903、 基站向对应的第一 L-GW发送删除会话请求。  Step 1903: The base station sends a delete session request to the corresponding first L-GW.
该删除会话请求以使对应的 L-GW删除已建立的 PDN连接。  The delete session request causes the corresponding L-GW to delete the established PDN connection.
歩骤 1904、第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或删除会话请求。 在本实施例中, UE与第二 L-GW之间可能有多条 PDN连接, 因此, 该 代理绑定更新会话请求中携带有代理绑定删除会话请求,以删除第一 L-GW 与第二 L-GW之间的承载, 即第一 L-GW针对每条 PDN连接发送删除会话请 求。 每一个删除会话请求中包含 LBI , 用以删除第一 L-GW与第二 L-GW之 间的默认承载标识为 LBI的 PDN连接。  Step 1904: The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW. In this embodiment, there may be multiple PDN connections between the UE and the second L-GW. Therefore, the proxy binding update session request carries a proxy binding deletion session request to delete the first L-GW and the first The bearer between the two L-GWs, that is, the first L-GW sends a delete session request for each PDN connection. Each delete session request includes an LBI for deleting a PDN connection whose default bearer identifier is LBI between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
歩骤 1905、 第二 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话终止流程。  Step 1905: The second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination process to the PCRF.
本实施例中, 如果部署了动态 PCC , 则第二 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN 会话终止流程。  In this embodiment, if a dynamic PCC is deployed, the second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
歩骤 1906、第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。 歩骤 1907、 第一 L-GW向基站发送删除会话响应。  Step 1906: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes the session response to the first L-GW. Step 1907: The first L-GW sends a delete session response to the base station.
歩骤 1908、基站向 MME发送去激活承载响应, 用以对去激活承载请求 的响应。  Step 1908: The base station sends a deactivation bearer response to the MME to respond to the deactivation of the bearer request.
歩骤 1909、 UE通过基站向 MME发送去附着接受消息。  Step 1909: The UE sends a detach accept message to the MME by using the base station.
歩骤 1910、 基站与 UE之间进行 RRC连接释放。  Step 1910: Perform an RRC connection release between the base station and the UE.
也就是说, MME通过 UE上下文释放命令指示基站与 UE之间进行空口 信令连接释放, 之后基站通过 UE上下文释放完成消息告知丽 E RRC连接 成功释放。 That is, the MME indicates the air interface between the base station and the UE through the UE context release command. The signaling connection is released, and then the base station informs the LG ERRC connection to be successfully released through the UE context release completion message.
需要说明的是, UE 也可以在不同网络架构的小区之间进行切换, 即 EPS网络与 D丽网络之间进行切换,无论 UE当前连接的是 DMM网络,或者, UE当前连接的是 EPS网络, 原理与图 19所示实施例的原理基本类似, 区 别在于第二 L-GW对应于 P-GW  It should be noted that the UE may also switch between cells of different network architectures, that is, switch between the EPS network and the Dali network, whether the UE is currently connected to the DMM network, or the UE is currently connected to the EPS network. The principle is basically similar to the principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. 19, except that the second L-GW corresponds to the P-GW.
图 20为本发明再一实施例通信方法的信令流程示意图; 如图 20所示 本实施例的适用场景是, UE在不同小区之间进行切换, 并且该些小区的网 络架构相同, 即 D丽网络, 并且, 在 UE与当前小区建立 PDN连接之后, MME可以发起去附着请求, 以释放 UE与 DMM网络之间的连接。在 D丽网络 中的 MME与 L-GW之间存在接口的场景下, UE的去附着可以包括如下歩骤: 歩骤 2001 MME通过基站向 UE发起去附着请求, 该去附着请求用以 通知 UE的去附着。  FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of a signaling procedure of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present invention; as shown in FIG. 20, the applicable scenario is that the UE performs handover between different cells, and the network architectures of the cells are the same, that is, D The network, and after the UE establishes a PDN connection with the current cell, the MME may initiate a detach request to release the connection between the UE and the DMM network. In a scenario where an interface exists between the MME and the L-GW in the D-network, the detaching of the UE may include the following steps: Step 2001: The MME initiates a detach request to the UE by using the eNB, and the detach request is used to notify the UE. Go to the attachment.
歩骤 2002 MME向第一 L-GW发送删除会话请求。  Step 2002: The MME sends a delete session request to the first L-GW.
在本实施例中, 该删除会话请求以使第一 L-GW删除已建立的 PDN连 接。  In this embodiment, the delete session request causes the first L-GW to delete the established PDN connection.
歩骤 2003、第一 L-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或删除会话请求。 在本实施例中, UE与第二 L-GW之间可能有多条 PDN连接资源, 因此, 该代理绑定更新中携带有第二 L-GW为 UE分配的 IP地址, 以删除该 IP地 址对应的 PDN连接。或者删除会话请求中包含 LBI , 以删除第一 L-GW与第 二 L-GW之间的默认承载标识为 LBI的 PDN连接。  Step 2003: The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW. In this embodiment, there may be multiple PDN connection resources between the UE and the second L-GW. Therefore, the proxy binding update carries the IP address assigned by the second L-GW to the UE, to delete the IP address. Corresponding PDN connection. Or deleting the LBI included in the session request to delete the PDN connection with the default bearer identifier LBI between the first L-GW and the second L-GW.
歩骤 2004、 第二 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN会话终止流程。  Step 2004: The second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
本实施例中, 如果部署了动态 PCC , 则第二 L-GW向 PCRF发起 IP-CAN 会话终止流程。  In this embodiment, if a dynamic PCC is deployed, the second L-GW initiates an IP-CAN session termination procedure to the PCRF.
歩骤 2005、第二 L-GW向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。 歩骤 2006、 第一 L-GW向 MME发送删除会话响应。  Step 2005: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes the session response to the first L-GW. Step 2006: The first L-GW sends a delete session response to the MME.
歩骤 2007 UE向 MME发送去附着接受消息。  Step 2007 The UE sends a detach accept message to the MME.
歩骤 2008、 基站与 UE之间进行 RRC连接释放。  Step 2008: The RRC connection is released between the base station and the UE.
也就是说, MME通过 UE上下文释放命令(UE Context Rel ease Co and ) 指示基站与 UE之间进行空口信令连接释放, 之后基站通过 UE上下文释放 完成 (UE Context Rel ease Comp l ete ) 消息告知 MME RRC连接成功释放。 需要说明的是, UE 也可以在不同网络架构的小区之间进行切换, 即 EPS网络与 D丽网络之间进行切换, 若 UE当前连接的是 DMM网络, 则与图 20所示实施例的原理基本相同, 区别在于第二 L-GW对应于 P-GW, 其余相 同部分不再赘述。 若 UE当前连接的是 EPS网络, 则与图 20所示实施例的 原理基本相同, 区别在于第一 L-GW对应于 S-GW或 P-GW, 具体的, 图 20 所示实施例中的歩骤 2002对应为 MME通过 S-GW向 P_GW发送删除会话请 求, 接着, 歩骤 2003对应为 P-GW向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或删除 会话请求, 其中, 第二 L-GW为之前 UE连接的 L-GW, 其余相同部分不再赘 述。 That is, the MME indicates that the air interface signaling connection between the base station and the UE is released by using the UE context release command (UE Context Rel ease Co and ), and then the base station releases through the UE context. The UE Context Relity Complete message informs the MME that the RRC connection is successfully released. It should be noted that the UE may also switch between cells of different network architectures, that is, switch between the EPS network and the Dali network. If the UE is currently connected to the DMM network, the principle of the embodiment shown in FIG. Basically the same, the difference is that the second L-GW corresponds to the P-GW, and the rest of the same parts will not be described again. If the UE is currently connected to the EPS network, the principle is the same as that of the embodiment shown in FIG. 20, except that the first L-GW corresponds to the S-GW or the P-GW. Specifically, in the embodiment shown in FIG. Step 2002 corresponds to the MME sending a delete session request to the P_GW through the S-GW, and then, in step 2003, the P-GW sends a proxy binding update or delete session request to the second L-GW, where the second L-GW For the L-GW connected to the previous UE, the rest of the same parts will not be described again.
图 21为本发明一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图, 如图 21所示, 该 L-GW 包括: 接收模块 2101、 处理模块 2102和发送模块 2103。 其中,  FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 21, the L-GW includes: a receiving module 2101, a processing module 2102, and a sending module 2103. among them,
接收模块 2101, 用于接收创建会话请求, 创建会话请求中携带有第二 本地网关 L-GW的地址标识或分组数据网网关 P-GW的地址标识,第二 L-GW、 P-GW为用户设备 UE切换到 L-GW之前连接的, UE当前与 L_GW连接;  The receiving module 2101 is configured to receive a create session request, where the session request carries an address identifier of the second local gateway L-GW or an address identifier of the packet data network gateway P-GW, where the second L-GW and the P-GW are users. The device UE is connected to the L-GW before being connected, and the UE is currently connected to the L_GW;
处理模块 2102,用于根据创建会话请求建立与第二 L-GW或 P-GW之间 的连接;  The processing module 2102 is configured to establish a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request.
发送模块 2103, 用于发送创建会话响应。  The sending module 2103 is configured to send a create session response.
进一歩的, 接收模块 2101, 具体用于接收与 L-GW对应的第一基站发 送的创建会话请求, 创建会话请求包括第二 L-GW的地址标识;  Further, the receiving module 2101 is specifically configured to receive a create session request sent by the first base station corresponding to the L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW;
处理模块 2102, 具体用于根据创建会话请求建立与第二 L-GW之间的 连接;  The processing module 2102 is specifically configured to establish a connection with the second L-GW according to the create session request.
发送模块 2103, 具体用于向第一基站发送创建会话响应。  The sending module 2103 is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first base station.
进一歩的, 接收模块 2101, 具体用于接收与 L-GW对应的第一移动性 管理实体 MME发送的创建会话请求, 创建会话请求包括第二 L-GW的地址 标识;  Further, the receiving module 2101 is configured to receive a create session request sent by the first mobility management entity MME corresponding to the L-GW, where the create session request includes an address identifier of the second L-GW;
处理模块 2102, 具体用于根据创建会话请求建立与第二 L-GW之间的 连接;  The processing module 2102 is specifically configured to establish a connection with the second L-GW according to the create session request.
发送模块 2103, 具体用于向第一 MME发送创建会话响应。  The sending module 2103 is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first MME.
进一歩的, 接收模块 2101, 具体用于接收与 L-GW对应的第一基站发 送的创建会话请求, 创建会话请求包括 P-GW的地址标识; Further, the receiving module 2101 is specifically configured to receive the first base station corresponding to the L-GW. Sending a session request, creating a session request including an address identifier of the P-GW;
处理模块 2102,具体用于根据创建会话请求建立与 P-GW之间的连接; 发送模块 2103, 具体用于向第一基站发送创建会话响应。  The processing module 2102 is specifically configured to establish a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request. The sending module 2103 is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first base station.
进一歩的, 接收模块 2101, 具体用于接收与第一 L-GW对应的第一移 动性管理实体 MME发送的创建会话请求, 创建会话请求包括 P-GW的地址 标识;  Further, the receiving module 2101 is configured to receive a create session request sent by the first mobility management entity MME corresponding to the first L-GW, where the session request includes an address identifier of the P-GW.
处理模块 2102,具体用于根据创建会话请求建立与 P-GW之间的连接; 发送模块 2103, 具体用于向第一 MME发送创建会话响应。  The processing module 2102 is specifically configured to establish a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request. The sending module 2103 is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first MME.
进一歩的, 发送模块 2103, 还用于向第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或 修改承载请求;  Further, the sending module 2103 is further configured to send a proxy binding update or modify a bearer request to the second L-GW;
接收模块 2101, 还用于接收第二 L-GW发送的代理绑定响应或修改承 载响应。  The receiving module 2101 is further configured to receive a proxy binding response sent by the second L-GW or modify the bearer response.
进一歩的, 发送模块 2103, 还用于向 P-GW发送代理绑定更新或修改 承载请求;  Further, the sending module 2103 is further configured to send a proxy binding update or modify a bearer request to the P-GW;
接收模块 2101, 还用于接收 P-GW发送的代理绑定响应或修改承载响 应。  The receiving module 2101 is further configured to receive a proxy binding response sent by the P-GW or modify the bearer response.
图 22为本发明另一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图,如图 22所示,该 L-GW 包括: 接收模块 2201、 处理模块 2202和发送模块 2203。 其中,  FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 22, the L-GW includes: a receiving module 2201, a processing module 2202, and a sending module 2203. among them,
接收模块 2201, 用于接收代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 本地网关 L-GW为用户设备 UE切换到第一 L-GW或分组数据网网关 P_GW之前连接的 ·' 处理模块 2202, 用于根据代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与第一 L-GW或 P-GW之间的连接;  The receiving module 2201 is configured to receive a proxy binding update or modify a bearer request, where the local gateway L-GW is configured to switch to the first L-GW or the packet data network gateway P_GW before the processing module 2202 The proxy binding updates or modifies the bearer request, establishing a connection with the first L-GW or the P-GW;
发送模块 2203, 用于发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。  The sending module 2203 is configured to send a proxy binding response or modify a bearer response.
进一歩的, 接收模块 2201, 具体用于接收第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定 更新或修改承载请求;  Further, the receiving module 2201 is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding sent by the first L-GW to update or modify the bearer request.
处理模块 2202, 具体用于根据代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与 第一 L-GW之间的连接;  The processing module 2202 is specifically configured to establish a connection with the first L-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request.
发送模块 2203, 具体用于向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载 响应。  The sending module 2203 is specifically configured to send a proxy binding response or modify a bearer response to the first L-GW.
进一歩的, 接收模块 2201, 具体用于接收 P-GW发送的代理绑定更新 或修改承载请求; Further, the receiving module 2201 is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding update sent by the P-GW. Or modify the bearer request;
处理模块 2202, 具体用于根据代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与 P-GW之间的连接;  The processing module 2202 is specifically configured to establish a connection with the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or modify the bearer request.
发送模块 2203,具体用于向 P-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。 进一歩的, 接收模块 2201, 还用于接收第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定更 新或删除会话请求;  The sending module 2203 is specifically configured to send a proxy binding response or modify a bearer response to the P-GW. Further, the receiving module 2201 is further configured to receive a proxy binding update sent by the first L-GW or delete the session request;
处理模块 2202, 还用于删除和第一 L-GW之间的连接;  The processing module 2202 is further configured to delete the connection with the first L-GW.
发送模块 2203, 还用于向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响 应。  The sending module 2203 is further configured to send a proxy binding response or delete the session response to the first L-GW.
进一歩的, 接收模块 2201, 还用于接收 P-GW发送的代理绑定更新或 删除会话请求;  Further, the receiving module 2201 is further configured to receive a proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the P-GW;
处理模块 2202, 还用于删除和 P-GW之间的连接;  The processing module 2202 is further configured to delete the connection between the P-GW and the P-GW.
发送模块 2203, 还用于向 P-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。 图 23为本发明再一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图,如图 23所示,该 L-GW 包括: 接收模块 2301、 处理模块 2302和发送模块 2303。 其中,  The sending module 2203 is further configured to send a proxy binding response or delete the session response to the P-GW. FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 23, the L-GW includes: a receiving module 2301, a processing module 2302, and a sending module 2303. among them,
接收模块 2301, 用于接收代理绑定更新或删除会话请求;  The receiving module 2301 is configured to receive a proxy binding update or delete a session request.
处理模块 2302, 用于删除与第一本地网关 L-GW之间的连接或与分组 数据网网关 P-GW之间的连接,第一 L-GW为用户设备 UE当前连接的, L-GW 或 P-GW为 UE连接第一 L-GW之前连接的;  The processing module 2302 is configured to delete the connection between the first local gateway L-GW or the connection with the packet data network gateway P-GW, where the first L-GW is currently connected by the user equipment UE, L-GW or The P-GW is connected before the UE connects to the first L-GW;
发送模块 2303, 用于发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。  The sending module 2303 is configured to send a proxy binding response or delete a session response.
进一歩的, 接收模块 2301, 具体用于接收第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定 更新或删除会话请求;  Further, the receiving module 2301 is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding sent by the first L-GW to update or delete the session request.
处理模块 2302, 具体用于删除与第一 L-GW之间的连接, 第一 L-GW 为用户设备 UE当前连接的, L-GW为 UE连接第一 L-GW之前连接的;  The processing module 2302 is specifically configured to delete the connection with the first L-GW, where the first L-GW is currently connected by the user equipment UE, and the L-GW is connected before the UE connects to the first L-GW;
发送模块 2303, 具体用于向第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话 响应, 以使第一 L-GW向第一 L-GW对应的第一基站或者第一 MME发送删除 会话响应。  The sending module 2303 is configured to send a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW, so that the first L-GW sends a delete session response to the first base station or the first MME corresponding to the first L-GW.
进一歩的, 接收模块 2301, 具体用于接收 P-GW发送的代理绑定更新 或删除会话请求;  Further, the receiving module 2301 is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding update sent by the P-GW or delete the session request.
处理模块 2302, 具体用于删除与 P-GW之间的连接, 第一 L_GW为用户 设备 UE当前连接的, P-GW为 UE连接第一 L-GW之前连接的; The processing module 2302 is specifically configured to delete the connection with the P-GW, where the first L_GW is a user. The device is currently connected to the UE, and the P-GW is connected before the UE connects to the first L-GW;
发送模块 2303, 具体用于向 P-GW发送删除会话响应, 以使 P-GW向与 The sending module 2303 is specifically configured to send a delete session response to the P-GW, so that the P-GW is
P-GW对应的第一服务网关发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。 The first serving gateway corresponding to the P-GW sends a proxy binding response or deletes the session response.
进一歩的, 接收模块 2301, 还用于接收第一 L-GW发送的修改承载请 求;  Further, the receiving module 2301 is further configured to receive a modified bearer request sent by the first L-GW;
发送模块 2303, 还用于向第一 L-GW发送修改承载响应。  The sending module 2303 is further configured to send a modify bearer response to the first L-GW.
图 24为本发明再一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图,如图 24所示,该 L-GW 包括: 接收模块 2401、 处理模块 2402和发送模块 2403。 其中,  FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 24, the L-GW includes: a receiving module 2401, a processing module 2402, and a sending module 2403. among them,
当用户设备 UE从第二基站切换到第一基站时,  When the user equipment UE switches from the second base station to the first base station,
接收模块 2401, 用于接收修改承载请求;  The receiving module 2401 is configured to receive a modify bearer request.
处理模块 2402, 用于将存储的 UE当前服务节点信息由第二基站信息 改为第一基站信息, 第一基站和第二基站对应同一本地网关;  The processing module 2402 is configured to change the stored current serving node information of the UE from the second base station information to the first base station information, where the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same local gateway;
发送模块 2403, 用于发送修改承载响应。  The sending module 2403 is configured to send a modify bearer response.
进一歩的, 接收模块 2401, 具体用于接收第一基站发送的修改承载请 求;  Further, the receiving module 2401 is specifically configured to receive a modified bearer request sent by the first base station;
发送模块 2403, 具体用于向第一基站发送修改承载响应。  The sending module 2403 is specifically configured to send a modify bearer response to the first base station.
进一歩的, 接收模块 2401, 具体用于接收第一 MME发送的修改承载请 求;  Further, the receiving module 2401 is specifically configured to receive a modified bearer request sent by the first MME;
发送模块, 具体用于向第一 MME发送修改承载响应。  The sending module is specifically configured to send a modified bearer response to the first MME.
图 25为本发明一实施例移动性管理实体的结构示意图,如图 25所示, 该 L-GW包括: 接收模块 2501、 处理模块 2502和发送模块 2503。 其中, 当用户设备从第二基站切换到第一基站时,  FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of a mobility management entity according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 25, the L-GW includes: a receiving module 2501, a processing module 2502, and a sending module 2503. Wherein, when the user equipment switches from the second base station to the first base station,
接收模块 2501, 用于接收对应的第一基站发送的路径切换请求, 路径 切换请求中携带有分布式移动管理 D丽标识和第一本地网关 L-GW地址, 路径切换请求以使第一 L-GW将第一 L-GW中存储的第二基站的信息修改为 第一基站的信息, 第一基站和第二基站对应同一第一 L-GW;  The receiving module 2501 is configured to receive a path switching request sent by the corresponding first base station, where the path switching request carries a distributed mobility management Dali identifier and a first local gateway L-GW address, and the path switching request is used to make the first L- The GW modifies the information of the second base station stored in the first L-GW to the information of the first base station, where the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same first L-GW;
处理模块 2502,用于根据路径切换请求切换第一基站的路径为第一基 站与第一 L-GW连接;  The processing module 2502 is configured to switch, according to the path switching request, the path of the first base station to be connected to the first L-GW by the first base station;
发送模块 2503, 用于向第一基站发送路径切换响应, 以使第一基站通 知第二基站进行资源释放。 图 26为本发明再一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图, 如图 26所示, 本地 网关 L-GW包括: 发射机 2601、 接收机 2602、 存储器 2603以及分别与发 射机 2601、 接收机 2602和存储器 2603连接的处理器 2604, 其中, 存储 器 2603中存储一组程序代码, 且处理器 2604用于调用存储器 2603中存 储的程序代码, 执行本发明图 1所示实施例提供的通信方法。 The sending module 2503 is configured to send a path switch response to the first base station, so that the first base station notifies the second base station to perform resource release. FIG. 26 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 26, the local gateway L-GW includes: a transmitter 2601, a receiver 2602, a memory 2603, and a transmitter 2601, a receiver 2602, and The processor 2604 is connected to the memory 2603. The memory 2603 stores a set of program codes, and the processor 2604 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory 2603 to execute the communication method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 of the present invention.
本实施例的 L-GW,可以用于执行本发明图 1实施例所提供的通信方法 实施例的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The L-GW of this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution of the embodiment of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present invention. The implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 27为本发明再一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图, 如图 27所示, L-GW 包括: 发射机 2701、 接收机 2702、 存储器 2703以及分别与发射机 2701、 接收机 2702和存储器 2703连接的处理器 2704, 其中, 存储器 2703中存 储一组程序代码,且处理器 2704用于调用存储器 2703中存储的程序代码, 执行本发明图 2所示实施例提供的通信方法。  FIG. 27 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 27, the L-GW includes: a transmitter 2701, a receiver 2702, a memory 2703, and a transmitter 2701, a receiver 2702, and a memory 2703, respectively. The connected processor 2704, wherein the memory 2703 stores a set of program codes, and the processor 2704 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory 2703 to execute the communication method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 of the present invention.
本实施例的 L-GW,可以用于执行本发明图 2实施例所提供的通信方法 实施例的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The L-GW of the present embodiment can be used to perform the technical solution of the embodiment of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present invention. The implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 28为本发明再一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图, 如图 28所示, L_GW 包括: 发射机 2801、 接收机 2802、 存储器 2803以及分别与发射机 2801、 接收机 2802和存储器 2803连接的处理器 2804, 其中, 存储器 2803中存 储一组程序代码,且处理器 2804用于调用存储器 2803中存储的程序代码, 执行本发明图 3所示实施例提供的通信方法。  28 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 28, the L_GW includes: a transmitter 2801, a receiver 2802, a memory 2803, and a transmitter 2801, a receiver 2802, and a memory 2803, respectively. The processor 2804 is configured to store a set of program codes in the memory 2803, and the processor 2804 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory 2803 to execute the communication method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 of the present invention.
本实施例的 L-GW,可以用于执行本发明图 3实施例所提供的通信方法 实施例的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The L-GW of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the embodiment of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present invention. The implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 29为本发明再一实施例 L-GW的结构示意图, 如图 29所示, L-GW 包括: 发射机 2901、 接收机 2902、 存储器 2903以及分别与发射机 2901、 接收机 2902和存储器 2903连接的处理器 2904, 其中, 存储器 2903中存 储一组程序代码,且处理器 2904用于调用存储器 2903中存储的程序代码, 执行本发明图 4所示实施例提供的通信方法。  FIG. 29 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-GW according to still another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 29, the L-GW includes: a transmitter 2901, a receiver 2902, a memory 2903, and a transmitter 2901, a receiver 2902, and a memory 2903, respectively. The connected processor 2904, wherein the memory 2903 stores a set of program codes, and the processor 2904 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory 2903 to execute the communication method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 of the present invention.
本实施例的 L-GW,可以用于执行本发明图 4实施例所提供的通信方法 实施例的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The L-GW of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the embodiment of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present invention. The implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 30为本发明另一实施例 MME 的结构示意图, 如图 30所示, L-GW 包括: 发射机 3001、 接收机 3002、 存储器 3003以及分别与发射机 3001、 接收机 3002和存储器 3003连接的处理器 3004, 其中, 存储器 3003中存 储一组程序代码,且处理器 3004用于调用存储器 3003中存储的程序代码, 执行本发明图 5所示实施例提供的通信方法。 FIG. 30 is a schematic structural diagram of an MME according to another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 30, the L-GW includes: a transmitter 3001, a receiver 3002, a memory 3003, and a transmitter 3001, respectively. The processor 3004 is connected to the processor 3003, wherein the memory 3003 stores a set of program codes, and the processor 3004 is configured to call the program code stored in the memory 3003 to perform the communication provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 of the present invention. method.
本实施例的 L-GW,可以用于执行本发明图 5实施例所提供的通信方法 实施例的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The L-GW of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the embodiment of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present invention. The implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解: 实现上述方法实施例的全部或部分歩 骤可以通过程序指令相关的硬件来完成, 前述的程序可以存储于一计算机 可读取存储介质中, 该程序在执行时, 执行包括上述方法实施例的歩骤; 而前述的存储介质包括: R0M、 RAM, 磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代 码的介质。  A person skilled in the art can understand that all or part of the steps of implementing the above method embodiments may be implemented by hardware related to program instructions, and the foregoing program may be stored in a computer readable storage medium, when executed, The steps of the foregoing method embodiments are performed; and the foregoing storage medium includes: various media that can store program codes, such as ROM, RAM, disk or optical disk.
最后应说明的是: 以上各实施例仅用以说明本发明的技术方案, 而非对 其限制; 尽管参照前述各实施例对本发明进行了详细的说明, 本领域的普通 技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改, 或者对其中部分或者全部技术特征进行等同替换; 而这些修改或者替换, 并 不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本发明各实施例技术方案的范围。  Finally, it should be noted that the above embodiments are only for explaining the technical solutions of the present invention, and are not intended to be limiting thereof; although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those skilled in the art will understand that The technical solutions described in the foregoing embodiments may be modified, or some or all of the technical features may be equivalently replaced; and the modifications or substitutions do not deviate from the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present invention. range.

Claims

权 利 要 求 书 claims
1、 一种通信方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 1. A communication method, characterized by including:
第一本地网关 L-GW接收创建会话请求, 所述创建会话请求中携带有 第二 L-GW的地址标识或分组数据网网关 P-GW的地址标识,所述第二 L-GW、 所述 P-GW为用户设备 UE切换到所述第一 L-GW之前连接的, UE当前与所 述第一 L-GW连接; The first local gateway L-GW receives a session creation request, and the session creation request carries the address identifier of the second L-GW or the address identifier of the packet data network gateway P-GW. The second L-GW, the The P-GW is the user equipment UE connected before switching to the first L-GW, and the UE is currently connected to the first L-GW;
所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接; The first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request;
所述第一 L-GW发送创建会话响应。 The first L-GW sends a create session response.
2、根据权利要求 1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一本地网关 L-GW 接收创建会话请求, 包括: 2. The method according to claim 1, wherein the first local gateway L-GW receives a session creation request, including:
所述第一 L-GW接收与所述第一 L-GW对应的第一基站发送的创建会话 请求, 所述创建会话请求包括所述第二 L-GW的地址标识; The first L-GW receives a session creation request sent by the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW, where the session creation request includes the address identification of the second L-GW;
所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接, 包括: The first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request, including:
所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW之间的连 接; The first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW according to the create session request;
所述第一 L-GW发送创建会话响应, 包括: The first L-GW sends a create session response, including:
所述第一 L-GW向所述第一基站发送创建会话响应。 The first L-GW sends a create session response to the first base station.
3、根据权利要求 1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一本地网关 L-GW 接收创建会话请求, 包括: 3. The method according to claim 1, wherein the first local gateway L-GW receives a session creation request, including:
所述第一 L-GW接收与所述第一 L-GW对应的第一移动性管理实体 MME 发送的创建会话请求, 所述创建会话请求包括所述第二 L-GW的地址标识; 所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接, 包括: The first L-GW receives a create session request sent by the first mobility management entity MME corresponding to the first L-GW, where the create session request includes the address identification of the second L-GW; The first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request, including:
所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW之间的连 接; The first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW according to the create session request;
所述第一 L-GW发送创建会话响应, 包括: The first L-GW sends a create session response, including:
所述第一 L-GW向所述第一 MME发送创建会话响应。 The first L-GW sends a create session response to the first MME.
4、根据权利要求 1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一本地网关 L-GW 接收创建会话请求, 包括: 4. The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the first local gateway L-GW Receive session creation requests, including:
所述第一 L-GW接收与所述第一 L-GW对应的第一基站发送的创建会话 请求, 所述创建会话请求包括所述 P-GW的地址标识; The first L-GW receives a session creation request sent by the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW, where the session creation request includes the address identification of the P-GW;
所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接, 包括: The first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request, including:
所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述 P-GW之间的连接; 所述第一 L-GW发送创建会话响应, 包括: The first L-GW establishes a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request; the first L-GW sends a create session response, including:
所述第一 L-GW向所述第一基站发送创建会话响应。 The first L-GW sends a create session response to the first base station.
5、根据权利要求 1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一本地网关 L-GW 接收创建会话请求, 包括: 5. The method according to claim 1, wherein the first local gateway L-GW receives a session creation request, including:
所述第一 L-GW接收与所述第一 L-GW对应的第一移动性管理实体 MME 发送的创建会话请求, 所述创建会话请求包括所述 P-GW的地址标识; 所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接, 包括: The first L-GW receives a create session request sent by the first mobility management entity MME corresponding to the first L-GW, where the create session request includes the address identification of the P-GW; the first The L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request, including:
所述第一 L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述 P-GW之间的连接; 所述第一 L-GW发送创建会话响应, 包括: The first L-GW establishes a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request; the first L-GW sends a create session response, including:
所述第一 L-GW向所述第一 MME发送创建会话响应。 The first L-GW sends a create session response to the first MME.
6、根据权利要求 1-3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一 L-GW 根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接, 包 括: 6. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that the first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request. connections, including:
所述第一 L-GW向所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或修改承载请求; 所述第一 L-GW接收所述第二 L-GW发送的代理绑定响应或修改承载响 应。 The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or a bearer modification request to the second L-GW; the first L-GW receives a proxy binding response or a bearer modification response sent by the second L-GW. .
7、 根据权利要求 1、 4、 5任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第 — L-GW根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 P_GW之间的 连接, 包括: 7. The method according to any one of claims 1, 4, and 5, characterized in that, the first L-GW establishes a connection with the second L-GW or the P_GW according to the create session request. connections, including:
所述第一 L-GW向所述 P-GW发送代理绑定更新或修改承载请求; 所述第一 L-GW接收所述 P-GW发送的代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。 The first L-GW sends a proxy binding update or bearer modification request to the P-GW; and the first L-GW receives the proxy binding response or bearer modification response sent by the P-GW.
8、 一种通信方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 8. A communication method, characterized by including:
第二本地网关 L-GW 接收代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 所述第二 L-GW为用户设备 UE切换到所述第一 L-GW或分组数据网网关 P-GW之前连 接的; The second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or bearer modification request, and the second The L-GW is connected before the user equipment UE switches to the first L-GW or the packet data network gateway P-GW;
所述第二 L-GW根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与所述 第一 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接; The second L-GW establishes a connection with the first L-GW or the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or bearer modification request;
所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response.
9、 根据权利要求 8所述的方法, 其特征在于, 9. The method according to claim 8, characterized in that,
所述第二本地网关 L-GW接收代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 包括: 第二本地网关 L-GW接收第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定更新或修改承载请 求; The second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or bearer modification request, including: the second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or bearer modification request sent by the first L-GW;
所述第二 L-GW根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与所述 第一 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的承载, 包括: The second L-GW establishes a bearer with the first L-GW or the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or bearer modification request, including:
所述第二 L-GW根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与所述 第一 L-GW之间的连接; The second L-GW establishes a connection with the first L-GW according to the proxy binding update or bearer modification request;
所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应, 包括: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a bearer modification response, including:
所述第二 L-GW向所述第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the first L-GW.
10、 根据权利要求 8所述的方法, 其特征在于, 10. The method according to claim 8, characterized in that,
所述第二本地网关 L-GW接收代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 包括: 第二本地网关 L-GW接收所述 P-GW发送的代理绑定更新或修改承载请 求; The second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or bearer modification request, including: the second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or bearer modification request sent by the P-GW;
所述第二 L-GW根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与所述 第一 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接, 包括: The second L-GW establishes a connection with the first L-GW or the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or bearer modification request, including:
所述第二 L-GW根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与所述 P-GW之间的连接; The second L-GW establishes a connection with the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or bearer modification request;
所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应, 包括: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a bearer modification response, including:
所述第二 L-GW向所述 P-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response to the P-GW.
1 1、 根据权利要求 8或 9所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第二 L-GW 发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应之后, 还包括: 11. The method according to claim 8 or 9, characterized in that, after the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a bearer modification response, it further includes:
第二本地网关 L-GW接收第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除会话请 求; The second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or session deletion request sent by the first L-GW;
所述第二 L-GW删除和所述第一 L-GW之间的连接; 所述第二 L-GW向所述第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。 The second L-GW deletes the connection with the first L-GW; The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW.
12、 根据权利要求 8或 10所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第二 L-GW 发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应之后, 还包括: 12. The method according to claim 8 or 10, characterized in that, after the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response, it further includes:
第二本地网关 L-GW接收所述 P-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除会话请 求; The second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or session deletion request sent by the P-GW;
所述第二 L-GW删除和所述 P-GW之间的连接; The second L-GW deletes the connection with the P-GW;
所述第二 L-GW向所述 P-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the P-GW.
13、 一种通信方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 13. A communication method, characterized by including:
第二本地网关 L-GW接收代理绑定更新或删除会话请求; The second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request;
所述第二 L-GW删除与第一 L-GW之间的连接或与分组数据网网关 P-GW 之间的连接, 所述第一 L-GW为用户设备 UE当前连接的, 所述第二 L-GW 或所述 P-GW为所述 UE连接所述第一 L-GW之前连接的; The second L-GW deletes the connection with the first L-GW or the connection with the packet data network gateway P-GW, the first L-GW is currently connected to the user equipment UE, and the second L-GW deletes the connection with the first L-GW or the connection with the packet data network gateway P-GW. The second L-GW or the P-GW is connected before the UE connects to the first L-GW;
所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response.
14、 根据权利要求 13所述的方法, 其特征在于, 14. The method according to claim 13, characterized in that,
所述第二本地网关 L-GW接收代理绑定更新或删除会话请求, 包括: 所述第二 L-GW接收第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除会话请求; 所述第二 L-GW删除与第一 L-GW之间的连接或与 P-GW之间的连接, 包括: The second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request, including: the second L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the first L-GW; the second L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the first L-GW; -GW deletes the connection with the first L-GW or the connection with the P-GW, including:
所述第二 L-GW删除与第一 L-GW之间的连接, 所述第一 L-GW为用户 设备 UE当前连接的, 所述第二 L-GW为所述 UE连接所述第一 L_GW之前连 接的; The second L-GW deletes the connection with the first L-GW, the first L-GW is currently connected to the user equipment UE, and the second L-GW is connected to the first L-GW for the UE. L_GW was connected before;
所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应, 包括: The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response, including:
所述第二 L-GW向所述第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应, 以使所述第一 L-GW向所述第一 L-GW对应的第一基站或者第一 MME发送删 除会话响应。 The second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW, so that the first L-GW sends a proxy message to the first base station or the first base station corresponding to the first L-GW. The MME sends a delete session response.
15、 根据权利要求 13所述的方法, 其特征在于, 15. The method according to claim 13, characterized in that,
所述第二本地网关 L-GW接收代理绑定更新或删除会话请求, 包括: 所述第二 L-GW接收所述 P-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除会话请求; 所述第二 L-GW删除与 P-GW之间的连接, 包括: The second local gateway L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request, including: the second L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the P-GW; the second L-GW receives the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the P-GW; -GW deletes the connection with P-GW, including:
所述第二 L-GW删除与所述 P-GW之间的连接, 所述第一 L-GW为用户 设备 UE当前连接的,所述 P-GW为所述 UE连接所述第一 L-GW之前连接的; 所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应, 包括: The second L-GW deletes the connection with the P-GW, and the first L-GW is a user The device UE is currently connected to, and the P-GW was connected to the first L-GW before the UE connected to it; the second L-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response, including:
所述第二 L-GW向所述 P-GW发送删除会话响应, 以使所述 P-GW向与 所述 P-GW对应的第一服务网关 S-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。 The second L-GW sends a delete session response to the P-GW, so that the P-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first serving gateway S-GW corresponding to the P-GW. .
16、 根据权利要求 13- 15任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第二 本地网关 L-GW接收第一 L-GW发送的删除会话请求之前, 还包括: 16. The method according to any one of claims 13 to 15, characterized in that, before the second local gateway L-GW receives the delete session request sent by the first L-GW, it further includes:
所述第二 L-GW接收所述第一 L-GW发送的修改承载请求; The second L-GW receives the modification bearer request sent by the first L-GW;
所述第二 L-GW向所述第一 L-GW发送修改承载响应。 The second L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first L-GW.
17、 一种通信方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 当用户设备 UE从第二基站 切换到第一基站时, 17. A communication method, characterized in that it includes: when the user equipment UE is handed over from the second base station to the first base station,
第一本地网关 L-GW接收修改承载请求; The first local gateway L-GW receives the bearer modification request;
所述第一 L-GW将存储的所述 UE当前服务节点信息由所述第二基站信 息改为第一基站信息, 所述第一基站和所述第二基站对应同一第一 L-GW; 所述第一 L-GW发送修改承载响应。 The first L-GW changes the stored current serving node information of the UE from the second base station information to the first base station information, and the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same first L-GW; The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response.
18、 根据权利要求 17所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一 L-GW接收 修改承载请求, 包括: 18. The method according to claim 17, wherein the first L-GW receives a bearer modification request, including:
所述第一 L-GW接收第一基站发送的修改承载请求; The first L-GW receives the modification bearer request sent by the first base station;
所述第一 L-GW发送修改承载响应, 包括: The first L-GW sends a modification bearer response, including:
所述第一 L-GW向所述第一基站发送修改承载响应。 The first L-GW sends a modification bearer response to the first base station.
19、 根据权利要求 17所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一 L-GW接收 修改承载请求, 包括: 19. The method according to claim 17, wherein the first L-GW receives a bearer modification request, including:
所述第一 L-GW接收第一 MME发送的修改承载请求; The first L-GW receives the modification bearer request sent by the first MME;
所述第一 L-GW发送修改承载响应, 包括: The first L-GW sends a modification bearer response, including:
所述第一 L-GW向所述第一 MME发送修改承载响应。 The first L-GW sends a modify bearer response to the first MME.
20、 一种通信方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 当用户设备从第二基站切换 到第一基站时, 20. A communication method, characterized in that it includes: when the user equipment switches from the second base station to the first base station,
第一移动性管理实体 MME接收对应的所述第一基站发送的路径切换请 求, 所述路径切换请求中携带有分布式移动性管理 D丽标识和第一本地网 关 L-GW地址, 所述路径切换请求以使第一 L-GW将所述第一 L-GW中存储 的第二基站的信息修改为第一基站的信息, 所述第一基站和所述第二基站 对应同一所述第一 L-GW; The first mobility management entity MME receives the corresponding path switching request sent by the first base station, where the path switching request carries the distributed mobility management ID and the first local gateway L-GW address, and the path Handover request to cause the first L-GW to modify the information of the second base station stored in the first L-GW to the information of the first base station, the first base station and the second base station Corresponding to the same first L-GW;
所述第一 MME根据所述路径切换请求切换所述第一基站的路径为所述 第一基站与所述第一 L-GW连接; The first MME switches the path of the first base station according to the path switching request to connect the first base station to the first L-GW;
所述第一丽 E向所述第一基站发送路径切换响应, 以使所述第一基站 通知所述第二基站进行资源释放。 The first MN sends a path switching response to the first base station, so that the first base station notifies the second base station to release resources.
21、 一种本地网关, 其特征在于, 包括: 21. A local gateway, characterized by including:
接收模块, 用于接收创建会话请求, 所述创建会话请求中携带有第二 本地网关 L-GW的地址标识或分组数据网网关 P-GW的地址标识, 所述第二 L-GW、 所述 P-GW为用户设备 UE切换到所述 L-GW之前连接的, UE当前与 所述 L-GW连接; A receiving module, configured to receive a session creation request, where the session creation request carries the address identifier of the second local gateway L-GW or the address identifier of the packet data network gateway P-GW, the second L-GW, the P-GW is the user equipment UE connected before switching to the L-GW, and the UE is currently connected to the L-GW;
处理模块, 用于根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接; A processing module configured to establish a connection with the second L-GW or the P-GW according to the create session request;
发送模块, 用于发送创建会话响应。 Send module, used to send create session response.
22、 根据权利要求 2 1所述的本地网关, 其特征在于, 22. The local gateway according to claim 21, characterized in that,
所述接收模块, 具体用于接收与所述 L-GW对应的第一基站发送的创 建会话请求, 所述创建会话请求包括所述第二 L-GW的地址标识; The receiving module is specifically configured to receive a session creation request sent by the first base station corresponding to the L-GW, where the session creation request includes the address identification of the second L-GW;
所述处理模块,具体用于根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW 之间的连接; The processing module is specifically configured to establish a connection with the second L-GW according to the create session request;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一基站发送创建会话响应。 The sending module is specifically configured to send a session creation response to the first base station.
23、 根据权利要求 2 1所述的本地网关, 其特征在于, 23. The local gateway according to claim 21, characterized in that,
所述接收模块, 具体用于接收与所述 L-GW对应的第一移动性管理实 体 MME发送的创建会话请求, 所述创建会话请求包括所述第二 L-GW的地 址标识; The receiving module is specifically configured to receive a session creation request sent by the first mobility management entity MME corresponding to the L-GW, where the session creation request includes the address identification of the second L-GW;
所述处理模块,具体用于根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述第二 L-GW 之间的连接; The processing module is specifically configured to establish a connection with the second L-GW according to the create session request;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一 MME发送创建会话响应。 The sending module is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first MME.
24、 根据权利要求 2 1所述的本地网关, 其特征在于, 24. The local gateway according to claim 21, characterized in that,
所述接收模块, 具体用于接收与所述 L-GW对应的第一基站发送的创 建会话请求, 所述创建会话请求包括所述 P-GW的地址标识; The receiving module is specifically configured to receive a session creation request sent by the first base station corresponding to the L-GW, where the session creation request includes the address identification of the P-GW;
所述处理模块, 具体用于根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述 P-GW之 间的连接; The processing module is specifically configured to establish a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request. connections between;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一基站发送创建会话响应。 The sending module is specifically configured to send a session creation response to the first base station.
25、 根据权利要求 2 1所述的本地网关, 其特征在于, 25. The local gateway according to claim 21, characterized in that,
所述接收模块, 具体用于接收与所述第一 L-GW对应的第一移动性管 理实体丽 E发送的创建会话请求, 所述创建会话请求包括所述 P-GW的地 址标识; The receiving module is specifically configured to receive a session creation request sent by the first mobility management entity MN corresponding to the first L-GW, where the session creation request includes the address identification of the P-GW;
所述处理模块, 具体用于根据所述创建会话请求建立与所述 P-GW之 间的连接; The processing module is specifically configured to establish a connection with the P-GW according to the create session request;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一 MME发送创建会话响应。 The sending module is specifically configured to send a create session response to the first MME.
26、 根据权利要求 2 1-23任一项所述的本地网关, 其特征在于, 所述发送模块, 还用于向所述第二 L-GW发送代理绑定更新或修改承 载请求; 26. The local gateway according to any one of claims 21-23, wherein the sending module is further configured to send a proxy binding update or bearer modification request to the second L-GW;
所述接收模块, 还用于接收所述第二 L-GW发送的代理绑定响应或修 改承载响应。 The receiving module is also configured to receive a proxy binding response or a modified bearer response sent by the second L-GW.
27、 根据权利要求 21、 24、 25任一项所述的本地网关, 其特征在于, 所述发送模块, 还用于向所述 P-GW发送代理绑定更新或修改承载请 求; 27. The local gateway according to any one of claims 21, 24, and 25, wherein the sending module is further configured to send a proxy binding update or bearer modification request to the P-GW;
所述接收模块, 还用于接收所述 P-GW发送的代理绑定响应或修改承 载响应。 The receiving module is also configured to receive a proxy binding response or a bearer modification response sent by the P-GW.
28、 一种本地网关, 其特征在于, 包括: 28. A local gateway, characterized by including:
接收模块, 用于接收代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 所述本地网关 L-GW为用户设备 UE切换到所述第一 L-GW或分组数据网网关 P-GW之前连 接的; A receiving module, configured to receive a proxy binding update or bearer modification request, where the local gateway L-GW is connected to the user equipment UE before switching to the first L-GW or packet data network gateway P-GW;
处理模块, 用于根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建立与所述 第一 L-GW或所述 P-GW之间的连接; A processing module configured to establish a connection with the first L-GW or the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or bearer modification request;
发送模块, 用于发送代理绑定响应或修改承载响应。 Sending module, used to send proxy binding responses or modify bearer responses.
29、 根据权利要求 28所述的本地网关, 其特征在于, 29. The local gateway according to claim 28, characterized in that,
所述接收模块, 具体用于接收第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定更新或修改 承载请求; The receiving module is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding update or bearer modification request sent by the first L-GW;
所述处理模块, 具体用于根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建 立与所述第一 L-GW之间的连接; The processing module is specifically used to update or modify the bearer request according to the proxy binding, and Establish a connection with the first L-GW;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改 承载响应。 The sending module is specifically configured to send a proxy binding response or a bearer modification response to the first L-GW.
30、 根据权利要求 28所述的本地网关, 其特征在于, 30. The local gateway according to claim 28, characterized in that,
所述接收模块, 具体用于接收所述 P-GW发送的代理绑定更新或修改 承载请求; The receiving module is specifically configured to receive a proxy binding update or bearer modification request sent by the P-GW;
所述处理模块, 具体用于根据所述代理绑定更新或修改承载请求, 建 立与所述 P-GW之间的连接; The processing module is specifically configured to establish a connection with the P-GW according to the proxy binding update or bearer modification request;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述 P-GW发送代理绑定响应或修改承载 响应。 The sending module is specifically configured to send a proxy binding response or a bearer modification response to the P-GW.
31、 根据权利要求 28或 29所述的本地网关, 其特征在于, 所述接收模块, 还用于接收第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除会 话请求; 31. The local gateway according to claim 28 or 29, wherein the receiving module is further configured to receive a proxy binding update or session deletion request sent by the first L-GW;
所述处理模块, 还用于删除和所述第一 L-GW之间的连接; The processing module is also configured to delete the connection with the first L-GW;
所述发送模块, 还用于向所述第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会 话响应。 The sending module is also configured to send a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW.
32、 根据权利要求 28或 30所述的本地网关, 其特征在于, 所述接收模块, 还用于接收所述 P-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除会 话请求; 32. The local gateway according to claim 28 or 30, wherein the receiving module is further configured to receive a proxy binding update or session deletion request sent by the P-GW;
所述处理模块, 还用于删除和所述 P-GW之间的连接; The processing module is also used to delete the connection with the P-GW;
所述发送模块, 还用于向所述 P-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响 应。 The sending module is also configured to send a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the P-GW.
33、 一种本地网关, 其特征在于, 包括: 33. A local gateway, characterized by including:
接收模块, 用于接收代理绑定更新或删除会话请求; The receiving module is used to receive proxy binding update or delete session requests;
处理模块, 用于删除与第一本地网关 L-GW之间的连接或与分组数据 网网关 P-GW之间的连接, 所述第一 L-GW为用户设备 UE当前连接的, 所 述 L-GW或所述 P-GW为所述 UE连接所述第一 L-GW之前连接的; A processing module configured to delete the connection with the first local gateway L-GW or the connection with the packet data network gateway P-GW, where the first L-GW is currently connected to the user equipment UE, and the L -GW or the P-GW is connected before the UE connects to the first L-GW;
发送模块, 用于发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响应。 Send module, used to send proxy binding response or delete session response.
34、 根据权利要求 33所述的本地网关, 其特征在于, 34. The local gateway according to claim 33, characterized in that,
所述接收模块, 具体用于接收第一 L-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除 会话请求; The receiving module is specifically configured to receive the proxy binding update or deletion sent by the first L-GW. session request;
所述处理模块,具体用于删除与第一 L-GW之间的连接,所述第一 L-GW 为用户设备 UE当前连接的, 所述 L-GW为所述 UE连接所述第一 L-GW之前 连接的; The processing module is specifically used to delete the connection with the first L-GW, the first L-GW is currently connected to the user equipment UE, and the L-GW is connected to the first L-GW for the UE. -GW was connected before;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一 L-GW发送代理绑定响应或删除 会话响应, 以使所述第一 L-GW向所述第一 L-GW对应的第一基站或者第一 MME发送删除会话响应。 The sending module is specifically configured to send a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first L-GW, so that the first L-GW sends a message to the first base station or the third base station corresponding to the first L-GW. An MME sends a delete session response.
35、 根据权利要求 33所述的本地网关, 其特征在于, 35. The local gateway according to claim 33, characterized in that,
所述接收模块, 具体用于接收所述 P-GW发送的代理绑定更新或删除 会话请求; The receiving module is specifically configured to receive the proxy binding update or delete session request sent by the P-GW;
所述处理模块,具体用于删除与所述 P-GW之间的连接,所述第一 L-GW 为用户设备 UE当前连接的, 所述 P-GW为所述 UE连接所述第一 L-GW之前 连接的; The processing module is specifically used to delete the connection with the P-GW, the first L-GW is currently connected to the user equipment UE, and the P-GW is connected to the first L-GW for the UE. -GW was connected before;
所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述 P-GW发送删除会话响应, 以使所述 P-GW向与所述 P-GW对应的第一服务网关发送代理绑定响应或删除会话响 应。 The sending module is specifically configured to send a delete session response to the P-GW, so that the P-GW sends a proxy binding response or a delete session response to the first serving gateway corresponding to the P-GW.
36、 根据权利要求 33-35任一项所述的本地网关, 其特征在于, 所述 接收模块, 还用于接收所述第一 L-GW发送的修改承载请求; 36. The local gateway according to any one of claims 33 to 35, characterized in that the receiving module is further configured to receive a bearer modification request sent by the first L-GW;
所述发送模块, 还用于向所述第一 L-GW发送修改承载响应。 The sending module is also configured to send a modification bearer response to the first L-GW.
37、 一种本地网关, 其特征在于, 包括: 当用户设备 UE从第二基站 切换到第一基站时, 37. A local gateway, characterized in that it includes: when the user equipment UE is handed over from the second base station to the first base station,
接收模块, 用于接收修改承载请求; The receiving module is used to receive modification bearer requests;
处理模块, 用于将存储的所述 UE 当前服务节点信息由所述第二基站 信息改为第一基站信息, 所述第一基站和所述第二基站对应同一所述本地 网关; A processing module configured to change the stored current serving node information of the UE from the second base station information to the first base station information, where the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same local gateway;
发送模块, 用于发送修改承载响应。 The sending module is used to send the modification bearer response.
38、 根据权利要求 37所述的本地网关, 其特征在于, 38. The local gateway according to claim 37, characterized in that,
所述接收模块, 具体用于接收第一基站发送的修改承载请求; 所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一基站发送修改承载响应。 The receiving module is specifically configured to receive a bearer modification request sent by the first base station; the sending module is specifically configured to send a bearer modification response to the first base station.
39、 根据权利要求 37所述的本地网关, 其特征在于, 所述接收模块, 具体用于接收第一 MME发送的修改承载请求; 所述发送模块, 具体用于向所述第一 MME发送修改承载响应。 39. The local gateway according to claim 37, characterized in that, The receiving module is specifically configured to receive a bearer modification request sent by the first MME; the sending module is specifically configured to send a bearer modification response to the first MME.
40、 一种移动性管理实体, 其特征在于, 包括: 当用户设备从第二基 站切换到第一基站时, 40. A mobility management entity, characterized in that it includes: when the user equipment is handed over from the second base station to the first base station,
接收模块, 用于接收对应的所述第一基站发送的路径切换请求, 所述 路径切换请求中携带有分布式移动性管理 DMM标识和第一本地网关 L-GW 地址, 所述路径切换请求以使第一 L-GW将所述第一 L-GW中存储的第二基 站的信息修改为第一基站的信息, 所述第一基站和所述第二基站对应同一 所述第一 L-GW; A receiving module, configured to receive a path switching request sent by the corresponding first base station, where the path switching request carries a distributed mobility management DMM identifier and a first local gateway L-GW address, where the path switching request ends with causing the first L-GW to modify the information of the second base station stored in the first L-GW to the information of the first base station, and the first base station and the second base station correspond to the same first L-GW ;
处理模块, 用于根据所述路径切换请求切换所述第一基站的路径为所 述第一基站与所述第一 L-GW连接; A processing module configured to switch the path of the first base station to connect the first base station to the first L-GW according to the path switching request;
发送模块, 用于向所述第一基站发送路径切换响应, 以使所述第一基 站与所述第二基站之间进行资源释放。 A sending module, configured to send a path switching response to the first base station to release resources between the first base station and the second base station.
41、 一种本地网关 L-GW, 其特征在于, 包括: 发射机、 接收机、 存储 器以及分别与所述发射机、所述接收机和所述存储器连接的处理器,其中, 所述存储器中存储一组程序代码, 且所述处理器用于调用所述存储器中存 储的程序代码, 执行如权利要求 1-7中任意一项所述的方法。 41. A local gateway L-GW, characterized in that it includes: a transmitter, a receiver, a memory, and a processor connected to the transmitter, the receiver, and the memory respectively, wherein: in the memory A set of program codes is stored, and the processor is configured to call the program codes stored in the memory to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-7.
42、 一种本地网关 L-GW, 其特征在于, 包括: 发射机、 接收机、 存储 器以及分别与所述发射机、所述接收机和所述存储器连接的处理器,其中, 所述存储器中存储一组程序代码, 且所述处理器用于调用所述存储器中存 储的程序代码, 执行如权利要求 8-12中任意一项所述的方法。 42. A local gateway L-GW, characterized in that it includes: a transmitter, a receiver, a memory, and a processor connected to the transmitter, the receiver, and the memory respectively, wherein: in the memory A set of program codes is stored, and the processor is configured to call the program codes stored in the memory to execute the method according to any one of claims 8-12.
43、 一种本地网关 L-GW, 其特征在于, 包括: 发射机、 接收机、 存储 器以及分别与所述发射机、所述接收机和所述存储器连接的处理器,其中, 所述存储器中存储一组程序代码, 且所述处理器用于调用所述存储器中存 储的程序代码, 执行如权利要求 13-16中任意一项所述的方法。 43. A local gateway L-GW, characterized in that it includes: a transmitter, a receiver, a memory, and a processor connected to the transmitter, the receiver, and the memory respectively, wherein: in the memory A set of program codes is stored, and the processor is configured to call the program codes stored in the memory to execute the method according to any one of claims 13-16.
44、 一种本地网关 L-GW, 其特征在于, 包括: 发射机、 接收机、 存储 器以及分别与所述发射机、所述接收机和所述存储器连接的处理器,其中, 所述存储器中存储一组程序代码, 且所述处理器用于调用所述存储器中存 储的程序代码, 执行如权利要求 17-19中任意一项所述的方法。 44. A local gateway L-GW, characterized in that it includes: a transmitter, a receiver, a memory, and a processor connected to the transmitter, the receiver, and the memory respectively, wherein: in the memory A set of program codes is stored, and the processor is configured to call the program codes stored in the memory to execute the method according to any one of claims 17-19.
45、 一种移动性管理实体丽 E , 其特征在于, 包括: 发射机、 接收机、 存储器以及分别与所述发射机、 所述接收机和所述存储器连接的处理器, 其中, 所述存储器中存储一组程序代码, 且所述处理器用于调用所述存储 器中存储的程序代码, 执行如权利要求 20中所述的方法。 45. A mobility management entity EL, characterized in that it includes: a transmitter, a receiver, a memory and a processor respectively connected to the transmitter, the receiver and the memory, wherein a set of program codes is stored in the memory, and the processor is used to call the program code stored in the memory, The method as claimed in claim 20 is performed.
PCT/CN2013/085334 2013-10-16 2013-10-16 Communication method, communication device, and communication system WO2015054850A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201380002528.6A CN105264956A (en) 2013-10-16 2013-10-16 Communication method, communication device, and communication system
PCT/CN2013/085334 WO2015054850A1 (en) 2013-10-16 2013-10-16 Communication method, communication device, and communication system

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2013/085334 WO2015054850A1 (en) 2013-10-16 2013-10-16 Communication method, communication device, and communication system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015054850A1 true WO2015054850A1 (en) 2015-04-23

Family

ID=52827554

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2013/085334 WO2015054850A1 (en) 2013-10-16 2013-10-16 Communication method, communication device, and communication system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN105264956A (en)
WO (1) WO2015054850A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108307504A (en) * 2016-09-23 2018-07-20 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Data transmission method and device

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109688631B (en) * 2017-10-19 2021-11-19 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Connection processing method and device

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102056129A (en) * 2009-11-05 2011-05-11 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Establishing method and device of local Internet protocol (IP) access connection
CN102111748A (en) * 2009-12-28 2011-06-29 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and system for establishing local internet protocol (IP) connection
US20130003697A1 (en) * 2011-07-01 2013-01-03 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Method and apparatus for supporting local ip access and selected ip traffic offload
CN102869116A (en) * 2011-07-05 2013-01-09 华为终端有限公司 Local network and method for establishing connection between local gateway and home base station

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102056129A (en) * 2009-11-05 2011-05-11 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Establishing method and device of local Internet protocol (IP) access connection
CN102111748A (en) * 2009-12-28 2011-06-29 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and system for establishing local internet protocol (IP) connection
US20130003697A1 (en) * 2011-07-01 2013-01-03 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Method and apparatus for supporting local ip access and selected ip traffic offload
CN102869116A (en) * 2011-07-05 2013-01-09 华为终端有限公司 Local network and method for establishing connection between local gateway and home base station

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108307504A (en) * 2016-09-23 2018-07-20 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Data transmission method and device
CN108307504B (en) * 2016-09-23 2020-09-25 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Data transmission method and device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN105264956A (en) 2016-01-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN107548127B (en) Method and apparatus for supporting data transmission
US9967781B2 (en) Apparatus and method for supporting handover
US9913174B2 (en) Method, device and system for implementing optimized inter-rat handover
JP5704666B2 (en) COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND USER DEVICE
EP2908566B1 (en) Method and system for realizing mobility management of evolved packet core network
KR101519547B1 (en) Method and apparatus for updating location information of user equipment
KR102282005B1 (en) Method and apparatus for establishing user plane bearer
US10660006B2 (en) Bearer handover control device and control method
CN108617013B (en) Method and apparatus for data transfer control between wireless network systems
US20110007748A1 (en) Method, system and apparatus for optimizing routes
WO2009024082A1 (en) A handing-off method and a terminal re-location method
JP6199862B2 (en) Handover failure prevention method
WO2013179542A1 (en) Network system, routing control device, routing control method, and nontemporary computer-readable medium for storing program
JP2019521588A (en) Communication control method and related network element
KR101175219B1 (en) Method and device for deleting bearer
WO2011140888A1 (en) Communication system and method for enhanced single radio voice call continuity
WO2017080266A1 (en) Method and apparatus for updating gateway information
WO2013044668A1 (en) Method and device for processing lipa bearer
WO2011137715A1 (en) Method and system for realizing single radio voice call continuity
WO2017080261A1 (en) Method and apparatus for updating gateway information
WO2015054850A1 (en) Communication method, communication device, and communication system
WO2009152757A1 (en) Data message sending method, apparatus and communication system
WO2011085578A1 (en) Method for acquiring bearer identity of the objective side bearer, bearer management network element and packet data gateway
WO2012167460A1 (en) Method and apparatus for realizing mobility of local ip access or selected ip traffic offload
CN105578539A (en) Optimal switching method supporting multiple PDN connections and corresponding network node

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 201380002528.6

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 13895667

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 13895667

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1